mpr 220 user manual
DESCRIPTION
MPR 220 User ManualTRANSCRIPT
alAAe 1010
User Manu
Indoor: MSS-1c + Outdoor: MPT-HC/MPT-MC
9500 MPR-E
3DB 18782 AAIssu
Rel. 2.2.0
October 2
Status: RELEASED
All rights reserved.Passing on and copying of this document,
use and communication of its contents is not permittedwithout written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent.
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2010 Alcatel-Lucent
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES ......................................................................................................................... 5
LIST OF TABLES ........................................................................................................................... 9
PREFACE......................................................................................................................................... 11Preliminary Information.............................................................................................................. 11Applicability................................................................................................................................. 12Scope ........................................................................................................................................... 12History.......................................................................................................................................... 12Change notes .............................................................................................................................. 13Handbook Structure ................................................................................................................... 13General on Alcatel-Lucent Customer Documentation ............................................................ 14
1 SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING ........................................ 191.1 Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List ......................................... 201.2 Specific label for MPR equipment ...................................................................................... 211.3 Applicable standards and recommendations ................................................................... 211.4 Safety Rules ......................................................................................................................... 22
1.4.1 General Rules................................................................................................................. 221.4.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command........................................................ 23
1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms).................................................................... 261.6 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges .................................................. 271.7 Cautions to avoid equipment damage ............................................................................... 28
2 PRODUCT INFORMATION AND PLANNING ............................................................................. 292.1 9500 Family overview .......................................................................................................... 31
2.1.1 9500 MPR System Family .............................................................................................. 352.1.2 Family elements described in this User Manual ............................................................. 362.1.3 MSS-1c ........................................................................................................................... 362.1.4 MPT-HC .......................................................................................................................... 372.1.5 MPT-MC.......................................................................................................................... 372.1.6 MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection ............................................................................... 382.1.7 MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection............................................................................... 402.1.8 Antennas......................................................................................................................... 40
2.2 Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC).................................... 412.3 Standard Features ............................................................................................................... 442.4 Radio Configurations .......................................................................................................... 442.5 Typical System Configurations .......................................................................................... 452.6 Environmental and Electrical Characteristics................................................................... 46
2.6.1 General characteristics (MSS-1c) ................................................................................... 462.6.2 General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)................................................................... 472.6.3 MPT-MC characteristics.................................................................................................. 482.6.4 MPT-HC characteristics .................................................................................................. 492.6.5 Radio performances ....................................................................................................... 492.6.6 General characteristics (Power Extractor) ...................................................................... 50
2.7 Parts Lists............................................................................................................................. 512.7.1 MSS-1c ........................................................................................................................... 512.7.2 MPT-HC optical interface option ..................................................................................... 512.7.3 MPT-HC with internal diplexer ........................................................................................ 522.7.4 MPT-MC with internal diplexer ........................................................................................ 542.7.5 MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz)........................................................ 56
2.8 Functional description ........................................................................................................ 592.8.1 MSS-1c (Indoor Unit) ...................................................................................................... 59
User Manual
Table of Contents
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 1/308
2.8.2 Fan unit ........................................................................................................................... 632.8.3 MPT-HC .......................................................................................................................... 642.8.4 Power Extractor .............................................................................................................. 732.8.5 MPT-MC.......................................................................................................................... 742.8.6 Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC.................................................... 752.8.7 TMN communication channels ....................................................................................... 782.8.8 Traffic profiles ................................................................................................................. 792.8.9 Ethernet Traffic Management ......................................................................................... 842.8.10 Quality Of Services (QoS) ............................................................................................ 852.8.11 Cross-connections ........................................................................................................ 892.8.12 Synchronization ............................................................................................................ 91
3 NE MANAGEMENT BY SOFTWARE APPLICATION................................................................. 953.1 WebEML start ....................................................................................................................... 953.2 Tool bar ................................................................................................................................. 973.3 Alarm Synthesis................................................................................................................... 983.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Area............................................................................................ 983.5 General Information on the Management State ................................................................ 993.6 Navigator area...................................................................................................................... 100
3.6.1 Commissioning ............................................................................................................... 1013.6.2 Performance Monitoring ................................................................................................. 1173.6.3 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 1263.6.4 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 1283.6.5 Monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 1293.6.6 Provisioning Tool............................................................................................................. 135
4 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 1494.1 Installation & Interconnection overview ............................................................................ 1494.2 Hardware Installation........................................................................................................... 151
4.2.1 Power consumption ........................................................................................................ 1514.2.2 Rack Installation ............................................................................................................. 1524.2.3 MSS-1c installation ......................................................................................................... 1624.2.4 MPT-HC Installation ........................................................................................................ 1684.2.5 MPT-MC Installation........................................................................................................ 2084.2.6 Power Extractor .............................................................................................................. 2284.2.7 Indoor Installation ........................................................................................................... 2294.2.8 Antenna Alignment ......................................................................................................... 237
4.3 Software local copy ............................................................................................................. 2464.3.1 Getting Started................................................................................................................ 2474.3.2 PC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 2474.3.3 Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC................................................... 2484.3.4 Local copy the WebEML to PC....................................................................................... 2504.3.5 Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE............................................................... 256
5 PROVISIONING............................................................................................................................ 259
6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-CLEARING ............................................................................ 2636.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 2636.2 Maintenance Philosophy..................................................................................................... 2646.3 Personal Computer (PC)/Laptop ........................................................................................ 2646.4 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................... 264
6.4.1 Before Going to Site Checklist ........................................................................................ 2646.4.2 PC Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 2656.4.3 Troubleshooting Basics................................................................................................... 2656.4.4 Troubleshooting with MSS-1c electrical or optical connection........................................ 271
User Manual
Table of Contents
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 12/308
6.4.5 Troubleshooting Path Problems...................................................................................... 2716.4.6 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems........................................................................ 2736.4.7 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems ............................................................................... 2736.4.8 Troubleshooting TMN Problems ..................................................................................... 274
6.5 Failed equipment removal and replacement ..................................................................... 2766.5.1 MSS-1c removal and replacement ................................................................................. 2766.5.2 MPT-HC removal and replacement................................................................................. 2766.5.3 MPT-MC removal and replacement ................................................................................ 276
6.6 Cleaning................................................................................................................................ 277
7 LINE–UP AND COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................... 2797.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 280
7.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 2807.1.2 Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage................... 2817.1.3 Conventions.................................................................................................................... 2817.1.4 Summary of the line–up, commissioning, and acceptance phases ................................ 2827.1.5 How to access the remote NE ........................................................................................ 283
7.2 Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up).......................................................... 2847.2.1 Turn–on preliminary operations ...................................................................................... 2847.2.2 Powering up the MSS-1c(s) with ODU(s) connected...................................................... 285
7.3 Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up).......................................................... 2857.4 Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B................................. 285
7.4.1 Fine antenna alignment .................................................................................................. 2857.4.2 Preliminary checks.......................................................................................................... 286
7.5 End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A ................................................. 2877.6 Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test) .................................................... 288
7.6.1 Installation and cabling visual inspection ........................................................................ 2907.6.2 System configuration ...................................................................................................... 2907.6.3 E1 traffic.......................................................................................................................... 2927.6.4 Ethernet traffic................................................................................................................. 2937.6.5 NE configuration ............................................................................................................. 2937.6.6 Data/Time settings .......................................................................................................... 2947.6.7 Hop E1 stability test ........................................................................................................ 2947.6.8 Ethernet Traffic stability test............................................................................................ 295
7.7 Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test) ................................................... 2997.8 Final operations ................................................................................................................... 2997.9 Annex A: fine antenna alignment ....................................................................................... 299
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 301
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK.............................................................................. 307
User Manual
Table of Contents
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 3/308
User Manual
Table of Contents
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 14/308
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. Multiservice Aggregation Layer ......................................................................................... 33Figure 2. Service Awareness ............................................................................................................ 33Figure 3. Packet Node ...................................................................................................................... 34Figure 4. Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation ...................................................................... 34Figure 5. 9500 MPR System Family ................................................................................................. 35Figure 6. MPT-HC ............................................................................................................................. 37Figure 7. MPT-MC............................................................................................................................. 37Figure 8. MPT-HC connection (electrical cable) ............................................................................... 38Figure 9. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to MSS-1c)............................... 39Figure 10. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to Station battery) .................. 39Figure 11. MPT-MC connection......................................................................................................... 40Figure 12. TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet ........................ 45Figure 13. TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction.......... 45Figure 14. MSS-1c block diagram..................................................................................................... 59Figure 15. MSS-1c front view............................................................................................................ 60Figure 16. MSS-1c rear view ............................................................................................................ 60Figure 17. MSS-1c and Fan unit ....................................................................................................... 63Figure 18. MPT system..................................................................................................................... 65Figure 19. 11-38 GHz MPT-HC housing ........................................................................................... 65Figure 20. 6 GHz MPT-HC housing .................................................................................................. 65Figure 21. 7-8 GHz MPT-HC housing ............................................................................................... 66Figure 22. MPT-HC block diagram.................................................................................................... 66Figure 23. 7/8 GHz MPT-HC architecture ......................................................................................... 69Figure 24. 11 to 38 GHz MPT-HC architecture ................................................................................. 69Figure 25. Power Extractor ............................................................................................................... 73Figure 26. 6 GHz and from 11 to 38 GHz MPT-MC housing............................................................. 74Figure 27. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC housing............................................................................................... 75Figure 28. Available loopbacks ......................................................................................................... 77Figure 29. Traffic profiles .................................................................................................................. 79Figure 30. Traffic profiles .................................................................................................................. 80Figure 31. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 81Figure 32. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 82Figure 33. E1 Traffic.......................................................................................................................... 83Figure 34. QoS in the MSS-1c .......................................................................................................... 85Figure 35. QoS in the MPT ............................................................................................................... 87Figure 36. Cross-connection............................................................................................................. 89Figure 37. E1 from/to Radio port....................................................................................................... 89Figure 38. E1 from/to Ethernet port .................................................................................................. 90Figure 39. Main view: System Overview........................................................................................... 97Figure 40. Inventory .......................................................................................................................... 101Figure 41. Software Download: Software Package versions ............................................................ 102Figure 42. Software download .......................................................................................................... 103Figure 43. Software Download: Active Software Package summary ................................................ 103Figure 44. Software Download: Stand-by Software Package summary............................................ 104Figure 45. Date/Time Configuration .................................................................................................. 105Figure 46. Site Information................................................................................................................ 106Figure 47. Protection Configuration .................................................................................................. 106Figure 48. Radio Configuration: FCM - RTPC .................................................................................. 109Figure 49. Radio Configuration: FCM - ATPC................................................................................... 109Figure 50. Radio Configuration: ACM - RTPC .................................................................................. 110Figure 51. Advanced Radio Configuration ........................................................................................ 110Figure 52. MSS-1c Configuration...................................................................................................... 111
User Manual
List of Figures
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 5/308
Figure 53. FTP Server Parameters................................................................................................... 112Figure 54. Network Interfaces........................................................................................................... 113Figure 55. Static Routing................................................................................................................... 114Figure 56. Trusted SNMP Managers ................................................................................................ 115Figure 57. Manager registration........................................................................................................ 115Figure 58. Backup / Restore ............................................................................................................. 116Figure 59. Performance History File Upload..................................................................................... 118Figure 60. Counter Thresholds ......................................................................................................... 118Figure 61. 15Min Counter activation ................................................................................................. 119Figure 62. 15Min Counter ................................................................................................................. 119Figure 63. 15Min Counter history...................................................................................................... 120Figure 64. 15Min Counter deactivation ............................................................................................. 120Figure 65. Adaptive Modulation counter activation ........................................................................... 121Figure 66. 15Min Counter ................................................................................................................. 122Figure 67. 15Min Counter history...................................................................................................... 122Figure 68. 15Min Counter deactivation ............................................................................................. 123Figure 69. Ethernet: Qos Counters ................................................................................................... 124Figure 70. Qos Counters example for Aggregate ............................................................................. 125Figure 71. Inventory .......................................................................................................................... 126Figure 72. Loopback activation ......................................................................................................... 127Figure 73. ACM Manual Management .............................................................................................. 127Figure 74. Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 128Figure 75. Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 130Figure 76. Power measurements...................................................................................................... 130Figure 77. Power measurements...................................................................................................... 131Figure 78. Modem measurements .................................................................................................... 132Figure 79. Modem measurements .................................................................................................... 133Figure 80. Events.............................................................................................................................. 134Figure 81. Provisioning Tool: Welcome screen................................................................................. 135Figure 82. Ethernet ports provisioning .............................................................................................. 136Figure 83. Cross connection TDM2TDM .......................................................................................... 138Figure 84. One shot tributaries configuration.................................................................................... 138Figure 85. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 139Figure 86. Cross connection to user Ethernet port ........................................................................... 140Figure 87. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 141Figure 88. Management port provisioning ........................................................................................ 142Figure 89. TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port................................................. 143Figure 90. Cross connection functional scheme ............................................................................... 144Figure 91. Network Synchronization Clock provisioning................................................................... 144Figure 92. NE bridge mode selection................................................................................................ 145Figure 93. Port VLAN provisioning.................................................................................................... 146Figure 94. Station interconnections with MPT-MC ............................................................................ 149Figure 95. Station interconnections with MPT-HC with Power Extractor........................................... 149Figure 96. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to MSS-1c)............................................................................................... 150Figure 97. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to Station battery) .................................................................................... 150Figure 98. Fixing the Rack to Floor (1) ............................................................................................. 153Figure 99. Fixing the Rack to Floor (2) ............................................................................................. 154Figure 100. Floor file drilling template............................................................................................... 155Figure 101. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor .................................................. 156Figure 102. Laborack ........................................................................................................................ 157Figure 103. Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) ................................................................................................... 158Figure 104. Top Rack Unit - Front/Rear ............................................................................................ 158
User Manual
List of Figures
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 16/308
Figure 105. Top Rack Unit - Fixed to rack......................................................................................... 158Figure 106. TRU Connections .......................................................................................................... 160Figure 107. TRU Grounding position on Laborack ........................................................................... 160Figure 108. ETSI Rack - Ground connection .................................................................................... 161Figure 109. Laborack - Ground connection ...................................................................................... 161Figure 110. Grounding ...................................................................................................................... 163Figure 111. Grounding....................................................................................................................... 163Figure 112. Power supply connector................................................................................................. 163Figure 113. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 164Figure 114. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 164Figure 115. Installation solution......................................................................................................... 165Figure 116. Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA).... 165Figure 117. Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA) ....... 166Figure 118. Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA) ... 166Figure 119. ....................................................................................................................................... 167Figure 120. ....................................................................................................................................... 167Figure 121. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz) ............................................... 169Figure 122. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz) ...................................................... 170Figure 123. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz) ........................................ 170Figure 124. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz) ............................................... 172Figure 125. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz) ........................................ 173Figure 126. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz) ...................................................... 174Figure 127. Composition of MPT-HC with external diplexer ............................................................. 175Figure 128. MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces ......................... 176Figure 129. 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing............................................... 176Figure 130. Label affixed on the MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER box.................................. 177Figure 131. Label affixed inside the MPT-HC BRANCHING box ...................................................... 178Figure 132. Example of integrated antenna Pole Mounting (with antenna and nose adapter) ...................................................................................................... 181Figure 133. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kit (3DB10137AAXX)............................ 182Figure 134. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-HC integrated antenna) ............. 183Figure 135. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion .......................................... 184Figure 136. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (11-38 GHz) ....................................... 184Figure 137. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: vertical polarization) ....... 185Figure 138. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization) ... 185Figure 139. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation................................................................ 186Figure 140. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion .......................................... 186Figure 141. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (11-38 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB) ..................................................................................................................... 187Figure 142. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAXX) ....................................................................................................................... 187Figure 143. Locations for Cable Grounds ......................................................................................... 204Figure 144. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)..................................... 209Figure 145. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)........................................ 210Figure 146. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)..................................... 211Figure 147. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)........................................ 211Figure 148. Composition of MPT-MC with external diplexer ............................................................. 212Figure 149. MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces ......................... 213Figure 150. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing ................................................. 214Figure 151. Label affixed on the MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER box................................. 215Figure 152. Label affixed inside the MPT-MC BRANCHING box...................................................... 216Figure 153. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-MC integrated antenna)............. 219Figure 154. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion.......................................... 220Figure 155. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6 GHz and 11-38 GHz)..................... 220
User Manual
List of Figures
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 7/308
Figure 156. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: vertical polarization) .......... 221Figure 157. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)...... 221Figure 158. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation................................................................ 222Figure 159. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion.......................................... 222Figure 160. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB) ..................................................................................................................... 223Figure 161. Short kit plug R2CT ....................................................................................................... 224Figure 162. Short kit plug R2CT items.............................................................................................. 224Figure 163. MPT/AWY Service Cord ................................................................................................ 239Figure 164. Checking Feedhead Flange with a Spirit level............................................................... 242Figure 165. Indicative head-on signal pattern for a parabolic antenna ............................................. 244Figure 166. Example Tracking Path Signals ..................................................................................... 245Figure 167. Example Tracking Path Signals on the First Side Lobe................................................. 245Figure 168. PC connection ............................................................................................................... 259Figure 169. Relative positions of stations A and B ........................................................................... 281Figure 170. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC............................... 292Figure 171. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC............................... 294Figure 172. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable................................................................................................................................... 296Figure 173. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 additional PCs ..... 297Figure 174. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers ................................................................................................................ 298
User Manual
List of Figures
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 18/308
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation) ........................... 41Table 2. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation)...................... 43Table 3. MSS-1c item codes ............................................................................................................. 51Table 4. CD-ROM Software codes.................................................................................................... 51Table 5. MPT-HC option.................................................................................................................... 51Table 6. MPT-HC codes with internal diplexer .................................................................................. 52Table 7. MPT-MC codes with internal diplexer .................................................................................. 54Table 8. 7 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer...................................................................... 56Table 9. 7 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer ...................................................................... 56Table 10. 7 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)................................................ 57Table 11. 8 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer .................................................................... 58Table 12. 8 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer .................................................................... 58Table 13. 8 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)................................................ 58Table 14. RSSI Table ........................................................................................................................ 72Table 15. Waveguide Flange Data .................................................................................................... 72Table 16. MPT-HC external interfaces ............................................................................................. 171Table 17. RF interface...................................................................................................................... 171Table 18. MPT-HC Output flanges with external antenna ................................................................. 201Table 19. 6-7-8GHz Flextwist waveguide.......................................................................................... 202Table 20. 11-38GHz Flextwist waveguide ......................................................................................... 202Table 21. MPT-MC external interfaces............................................................................................. 210Table 22. RF interface...................................................................................................................... 210Table 23. Pin Function: Tributaries 1- 8 ............................................................................................ 235Table 24. Pin Function: Tributaries 9- 10 .......................................................................................... 236Table 25. MSS-1c and Fans Alarm Matrix ........................................................................................ 266Table 26. MPT-HC Alarm Matrix ....................................................................................................... 267Table 27. MPT-MC Alarm Matrix ....................................................................................................... 269Table 28. TMN Network Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 274Table 29. Test and commissioning instruments ................................................................................ 280
User Manual
List of Tables
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 9/308
User Manual
List of Tables
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 110/308
PREFACE
Preliminary Information
WARRANTY
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to which this handbook refers to.
Alcatel–Lucent makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Alcatel–Lucent will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, inci-dental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
INFORMATION
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of Alcatel–Lucent.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of Alcatel–Lucent and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment:
1) Service PersonnelInstallation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent-damaging the equipment.
2) Access to the EquipmentAccess to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3) Safety RulesRecommended safety rules are indicated in Chapter 1 from page 19.
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 11/308
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will pre-vail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will pre-vail.
SERVICE PERSONNEL SKILL
Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in par-ticular on the equipment subject of this handbook.
An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of merely reading this handbook is considered as not enough.
Applicability
This handbook applies to the following product–release:
PRODUCT
9500 MPR-E
PRODUCT RELEASE
MSS-1c/MPT-HC/MPT-MC 2.2.0
Scope
This document aims to describe the hardware and software functionalities of the 9500 MPR MPT-Access.
This document is intended to the technicians involved in Planning, in Operation and Maintenance and in Commissioning of the 9500 MPR MPT-Access.
History
ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTIONS
01 October 2010
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 112/308
Change notes
Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel-Lucent standardized “drawing-up guides" com-plying with such suggestion.
This handbook is divided into the main topics described in the table of contents:
PREFACE It contains general information as preliminary information, hand-book scope, history. Furthermore, it describes the handbook struc-ture and the customer documentation.
SAFETY This section includes all the safety instructions.
PRODUCT INFORMATIONAND PLANNING
This section provides the equipment description (at system, MSS-1c and Outdoor levels), introduces the basic information regarding the HW architecture, and gives its technical characteristics.
NE MANAGEMENT BYSOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
This section gives the description and use of the SW tools available for the NE management.
INSTALLATION This section provides whole information regarding Equipment hard-ware installation. Moreover, it contains the whole operative information on:– provisioning of equipment items (P/Ns, equipping rules)– their physical position in the system– unit assembly and front panel drawings, with the description
on the access point usage (connectors, visual indicators, but-tons).
This section provides also the whole operative instructions for the preparation of the Craft Terminal for the Line–Up and Commission-ing of the two NEs making up the radio link.
PROVISIONING This section gives all the instructions to provision (to configure) the NE.
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-CLEARING
This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance and system upgrade.
LINE-UP AND COMMISSIONING
This section provides all the instructions for the line-up and com-missioning of the NE.
ABBREVIATIONS The abbreviation list is supplied.
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTA-TION FEEDBACK
It contains info regarding customer opinions collection about this documentation.
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 13/308
General on Alcatel-Lucent Customer Documentation
This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel–Lucent Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Doc-umentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.
Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation
a) DefinitionStandard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant–indepen-dent and is always independent of any Customization.Plant–dependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned.N.B. Plant–dependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
b) Aims of standard Customer DocumentationStandard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintain-ing the equipment according to Alcatel–Lucent Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular:• the contents of the chapters associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the man–machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;• maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design andproduction documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
a) ProductsA “product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for.E.g. 9500 MPR is a product.
b) Product-releasesA ”product” evolves through successive “product–releases”, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain ”product–release” availability date. A certain ”product–release” performs more functionalities than the previous one.E.g. Rel.1.0 and Rel.2.0 are two successive “product–releases” of the same “product”.A “product–release” comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one “Software Pack-age” (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment perfor-mances that the specific “product–release” has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c) Configurations and Network ElementsIn some cases, a “product–release” includes different possible “configurations” which are distin-guished from one another by different “Network Element” (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs.
d) SWP releases, versions, and CD–ROMs• Each SWP is distributed by means of a specific SWP CD–ROM.• A SWP is identified by its “Denomination”, “P/N” (Part Number) and “CS” (Change Status), that
are printed on the CD–ROM’s label:– the first and second digits of the “Denomination” (e.g. 2.0) correspond to the “HW product–
release” number;– the third digit of the of the “Denomination” (e.g. 2.0.2) identifies the Version Level of the
SWP.
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 114/308
• A SWP with new Version Level, providing main features in addition to those of the previous Ver-sion Level SWP, is distributed by means of a SWP CD–ROM having new “Denomination”,“P/N” (Part Number), and “CS” restarting from 01
• A SWP patch version, if any, is created to correct SW bugs, and/or to add minor features, andis distributed by means of a SWP CD–ROM, that can be identified:– by the same “P/N” of the former CD–ROM, but with an incremented “CS” number
(e.g.CS=02 instead of previous CS=01)– or by a new “P/N”, and “CS” restarting from 01.
Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the "product-release" are listed in “History“ on page 12.
Each handbook is identified by: – the name of the "product–release" (and "version" when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones), – the handbook name, – the handbook Part Number, – the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
Changes introduced in the same product–release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the edi-torial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In this case:
• the changes with respect to the previous edition are listed in “History” on page 12;• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and draw-
ings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal edi-tions.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONSHandbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator's Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software "version" distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product–release's "version" marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria.By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (sup-plying errata-corrige sheets is not envisaged).
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 15/308
Changes due to new product version
A new product version changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
Customer documentation on CD-ROM
In the following by 'CD-ROM' it is meant 'Customer Documentation on CD-ROM'
Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM
In most cases, a CD-ROM contains in read-only eletronic format the documentation of one product-release(-version) and for a certain language.In some other cases, the same CD-ROM can contain the documentation of different product-release(-ver-sion)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
– CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
• the Installation Guides
• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel-Lucent together with the main applicative SW.
– CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:
• the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel-Lucent together with the main equipment).
A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CD-ROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus-free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department, so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
Use of the CD-ROM
The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
The CD-ROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened “Index" document permit to visualize the .pdf handbooksOther hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been installed on the platform.The CD-ROM doesn't contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting and installing it.ReadMe info is present on the CD-ROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 116/308
CD-ROM identification
Each CD-ROM is identified:
1) by external identifiers, that are printed on the CD-ROM upper surface:– the name of the "product-release(s)" (and "version" if applicable) – a writing indicating the language(s),– the CD-ROM Part Number), – the CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created.
CD-ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in previous para. point 2) , in association with the CD-ROM's own P/N-edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured list.Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel-Lucent archive system, a check in the Alcatel-Information-System is made to identify the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents.This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM.
Updating of CD-ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks com-posing the collection.
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 17/308
User Manual
Preface
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 118/308
1 Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Labelling
This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be con-sidered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
This chapter is organized as follows:
– Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List
– Specific label for MPR equipment
– Applicable standards and recommendations
– Safety Rules
– Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
– Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
– Cautions to avoid equipment damage
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 19/308
1.1 Declaration of conformity to CE marking and Countries List
Indication of the countries where the equipment is intended to be used: Austria (AT) - Belgium (BE) - Bulgaria (BG) - Switzerland/Liechtenstein (CH) - Cyprus (CY) - Czech Republic (CZ) - Germany (DE) - Denmark (DK) - Estonia (EE) - Finland (FI) - France (FR) - Greece (GR) - Hungary (HU) – Italy (IT) - Ireland (IE) - Iceland (IS) - Lithuania (LT) – Luxembourg (LU) - Latvia (LV) - Malta (MT) - Netherlands (NL) - Norway (NO) –Poland (PL) – Portugal (PT) - Romania (RO) – Spain (SP) - Sweden (SE) - Slovenia (SI) - Slovak Republic (SK) -United Kingdom (UK)
Indication of the intended use of the equipment: Point to Point PDH/Ethernet Transport radio Link
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 120/308
1.2 Specific label for MPR equipment
The label is sticked on the MSS-1c and on the MPT-HC/MPT-MC.
Field Field Name Note
A Alcatel-Lucent Logo
B Equipment acronym
C Power Supply range See NB 1 for MSS-1cSee NB 2 for MPT-HCSee NB 3 for MPT-MCD Current range
E European Community Logo
F Not harmonized frequency logo
G WEEE Logo
H Electrostatic Device Logo
NB 1: – 38.4 V / - 57.6 V; 3.3 A max.
NB 2: – 28 V / - 58 V; 1.6 A / 0.8 A
NB 3: – 28 V / - 58 V; 1.6 A / 0.8 A
1.3 Applicable standards and recommendations
1999/5/CE of 09 March 1999
Safety: EN 60950, EN 60825-1, EN 60825-2, EN 50385
EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4
Spectrum: EN 302 217-2-2
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 21/308
1.4 Safety Rules
1.4.1 General Rules
Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in particular:
– Hardware Installation
– Commissioning
– Maintenance and Upgrade
Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant: • "personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware
of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measure-ments to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others".
• The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. • The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is
not permitted. • The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access
to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflam-mable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions ect.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safe-guard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 122/308
1.4.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
– dangerous electrical voltages – harmful optical signals – risk of explosion – moving mechanical parts – heat-radiating Mechanical Parts – microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed.
The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alca-tel-Lucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
[1] Labeling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equip-ment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
[2] Safety instructions
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules:
• Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
• Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
Note
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 23/308
Risks of Explosions: labeling and safety instructions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
Moving Mechanical Parts: labeling and safety instructions
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
Equipment connection to earth
Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the suitable symbol:
The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the Hardware Installation section.
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 124/308
Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts: labeling and safety instructions
The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
Optical safety
The equipment contains Class 1 laser component according to IEC 60825-1 (par. 5).
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The laser source is placed in the optional SFP plug-in, which has to be installed in the MSS-1c. The laser source is placed in the left side of the SFP plug-in.
According to the IEC 60825-1 the explanatory label is not sticked on the equipment due to the lack of space.
Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure):
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
– Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public.
– Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
– Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to operate inside compliance bound-aries.
– Assure good cable connection.
– Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high).
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 25/308
– Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic shutdown.
Place the relevant stickers:
EMF emission warning sign
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top installation)
– Warning label "Do not stand on the antenna axis"
On the mast (front side)
– EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by some-one moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation)
On the antenna (rear side)
– EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the related sections of this Manual, in particular:
– Hardware Installation
– Maintenance and Upgrade
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this Manual by the symbol and term:
EMC Norms
[1] EMC General Norms - Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's "Installation Norms" (or similar documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 126/308
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper diameter and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (con-tact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given
[2] EMC General Norms - Turn-on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
[3] EMC General Norms - Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1.6 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary mea-sures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the instal-lation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with anti static protection devices consisting of:
– an elasticized band worn around the wrist
– a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 27/308
1.7 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
a. Anti static protection device kit
Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and cards out of their own box, this kit (Illustration below) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
Anti static protection device kit
b. Screw fixing
In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI-EMC performance.
The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) ±10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
c. MSS-1c-ODU cable disconnection / connection
Before to disconnect or connect the MSS-1c-ODU cable (at MSS-1c or ODU side) switch off the cor-responding MSS-1c Unit.
User Manual
Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD Norms and Equipment Label-
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 128/308
2 Product information and planning– 9500 Family overview (par. 2.1 on page 31)
• 9500 MPR System Family (par. 2.1.1 on page 35) • Family elements described in this User Manual (par. 2.1.2 on page 36) • MSS-1c (par. 2.1.3 on page 36)• MPT-HC (par. 2.1.4 on page 37)• MPT-MC (par. 2.1.5 on page 37)• MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection (par. 2.1.6 on page 38)• MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection (par. 2.1.7 on page 40)• Antennas (par. 2.1.8 on page 40)
– Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.2 on page 41)
– Standard Features (par. 2.3 on page 44)
– Radio Configurations (par. 2.4 on page 44)
– Typical System Configurations (par. 2.5 on page 45)
– Environmental and Electrical Characteristics (par. 2.6 on page 46)• General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1 on page 46)• General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.6.2 on page 47)• MPT-HC characteristics (par. 2.6.4 on page 49)
– 6 to 13 GHz (par. 2.6.4.1 on page 49)– 15 to 38 GHz (par. 2.6.4.2 on page 49)
• MPT-MC characteristics (par. 2.6.3 on page 48)– 6 to 13 GHz (par. 2.6.3.1 on page 48)– 15 to 38 GHz (par. 2.6.3.2 on page 48)
• Radio performances (par. 2.6.5 on page 49) • General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1 on page 46) • General characteristics (Power Extractor) (par. 2.6.6 on page 50)
– Parts Lists (par. 2.7 on page 51)• MSS-1c (par. 2.7.1 on page 51) • MPT-HC optical interface option (par. 2.7.2 on page 51) • MPT-HC with internal diplexer (par. 2.7.3 on page 52) • MPT-MC with internal diplexer (par. 2.7.4 on page 54) • MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz) (par. 2.7.5 on page 56)
– Functional description (par. 2.8 on page 59)• MSS-1c (Indoor Unit) (par. 2.8.1 on page 59)
– Power supply (par. 2.8.1.2 on page 61)– Ethernet switch (par. 2.8.1.3 on page 61)– E1 Interface (par. 2.8.1.4 on page 61)– MPT Interface (par. 2.8.1.5 on page 62)
• Fan unit (par. 2.8.2 on page 63)• MPT-HC (par. 2.8.3 on page 64)
– MPT-HC block diagram (par. 2.8.3.1 on page 66)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 29/308
– RSSI Monitoring Point (par. 2.8.3.2 on page 72)– Waveguide Flange Data (par. 2.8.3.3 on page 72)
• Power Extractor (par. 2.8.4 on page 73)• MPT-MC (par. 2.8.5 on page 74)• Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC (par. 2.8.6 on page 75)
– Frequency Agility (par. 2.8.6.1 on page 75)– Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) (par. 2.8.6.2 on page 75)– Transmitted power control: RTPC function (par. 2.8.6.3 on page 76)– Power Monitoring (par. 2.8.6.4 on page 76)– Adaptive Equalization (par. 2.8.6.5 on page 76)– Link identifier (par. 2.8.6.6 on page 76)– Loopbacks (par. 2.8.6.7 on page 76)– Loopback activation (par. 2.8.6.8 on page 77)– Loopback life time (par. 2.8.6.9 on page 78)
• TMN communication channels (par. 2.8.7 on page 78)• Traffic profiles (par. 2.8.8 on page 79)
– TDM2TDM (par. 2.8.8.1 on page 81)– TDM2Eth (par. 2.8.8.2 on page 82)– ETH2ETH (par. 2.8.8.3 on page 83)
• Ethernet Traffic Management (par. 2.8.9 on page 84)– Bridge type change (par. 2.8.9.1 on page 84)– Reserved Multicast Addresses (par. 2.8.9.2 on page 84)
• Quality Of Services (QoS) (par. 2.8.10 on page 85)– QoS in the MSS-1c (par. 2.8.10.1 on page 85)– QoS in the MPT (par. 2.8.10.2 on page 87)
• Cross-connections (par. 2.8.11 on page 89)– E1 Cross-connection (par. 2.8.11.1 on page 89)– Ethernet flows (par. 2.8.11.2 on page 90)
• Synchronization (par. 2.8.12 on page 91)– Synchronization overview (par. 2.8.12.1 on page 91)– Synchronization interface (par. 2.8.12.2 on page 93)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 130/308
2.1 9500 Family overview
9500MPR introduces new elements to the microwave packet family. The most compact IDU solutions (MSS-1c) for E1 and Ethernet hybrid connectivity as well as with a zero footprint solution (no IDU) addressing full out-door applications. The new set of multipurpose ODUs, the MPT addressing any appli-cation in the microwave domain. Stand alone as well as coupled in split mount solutions applications depending on the network requirement and layout. The MPT is available in a variety of flavors to address in the most cost effective the different part of the network, this also include millimeter wavelength.
The 9500 Microwave Packet Radio (MPR) is a microwave digital radio family that supports both PDH and packet data (Ethernet) for migrating from TDM to IP. The 9500 MPR provides a generic, modular IP platform for multiple network applications (including 2G/3G/HSDPA/WiMAX backhauling to Metro Ethernet areas) to accommodate broadband services. The 9500 MPR radio family supports low, medium, and high capacity applications using European data rates, frequencies, channel plans, and tributary interfaces:
– TDM/PDH Data Rates: E1
– ATM Data Rates: E1
– Ethernet Data Speed: 10, 100, 1000 Mb/s
– RF Frequency Range: 6 to 38 GHz
Three types of Indoor Units are available:
1) MSS-8, a 2U shelf, connected to an outdoor RF unit (split mount system). Supported ODUs:– ODU300– MPT-HC– MPT-MC
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 31/308
2) MSS-4, one 1U shelf, connected to an outdoor RF unit (split mount system). Supported ODUs:– ODU300– MPT-HC– MPT-MC
3) MSS-1c. Compact IDU that complements the existing portfolio addressing the last mile, the far end application in nodal solution and cost optimized point-to-point applications. Its small size of 1U height and half rack width drastically reduces the space consumption in busy sites. Supported ODUs:– MPT-HC– MPT-MC
MPT is a new multipurpose ODU to address any microwave application, extremely compact in size pro-viding:
– MPT-MC: 155 Mbps max.
– MPT-HC: 340 Mbps max.
MPT-xx can be deployed in stand-alone configuration (9500 MPR-e) or it can be deployed in split mount solution connected to any MSS-x IDU.
– Up to 12 MPT connected to an MSS-8; highest density ever
– Up to 6 MPT connected to an MSS-4; highest density ever
– Up to 2 MPT HC/MC connected to MSS-1c (up to 1 limited in the current version)
9500 MPR-e is the stand alone, full outdoor application of the MPT xx to address full Ethernet site back-hauling (fix or mobile alike) and to address converged MPLS metro networks reducing the number of deployed equipment.
The 9500 MPR innovative solutions mainly are:
[1] Multiservice aggregation layer: the capacity to use Ethernet as a common transmission layer to transport any kind of traffic, independently by the type of interface. Ethernet becomes the conver-gence layer.
[2] Service awareness: traffic handling and quality management, queuing traffic according to the type of service assigned, independently by the type of interface
[3] Packet node: no service aggregation limits with all traffic aggregated in packets, in term of: capacity, type of service requirements and type of interface
[4] Service-driven adaptive modulation: fully exploit the air bandwidth in its entirety by changing mod-ulation scheme according to the propagation availability and allocate transport capacity, discrimi-nating traffic by different services, only possible in a packet-based environment.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 132/308
[1] Multiservice aggregation layer
Figure 1. Multiservice Aggregation Layer
9500 MPR aggregates and carries over a COMMON PACKET LAYER: TDM 2G, 3G and IP/Ethernet. This allows sharing of common packet transmission infrastructures, regardless of the nature of carried traffic.
Due to the nature of Ethernet, each service can be discriminated based on several parameters like quality of service.
Mapping different access technologies over Ethernet is achieved by standardized protocols like circuit emulation and pseudo-wire.
[2] Service awareness
Figure 2. Service Awareness
Service awareness means the ability to discriminate the different traffic types carried over the converged Ethernet stream. The traffic flow can be composed by E1 and/or IP/Eth, coming from different sources, and therefore having different requirements.
Service awareness is what allows identifying the traffic types, and in case of the non real time variable bit rate one, optimize the band with overbooking of the radio scarce resource.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 33/308
[3] Packet node
Figure 3. Packet Node
9500 MPR offers a SINGLE PACKET MATRIX able to switch, aggregate and handle any of the possible incoming traffic types with virtually no capacity limits (up to 10 GBps).
[4] Service-driven adaptive modulation
Figure 4. Service-driven Packet Adaptive Modulation
Traffic with high priority will always have bandwidth available, like voice (deterministic approach).
Broadband traffic is discriminated by QoS dynamically, with modulation scheme changes driven by propagation conditions.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 134/308
2.1.1 9500 MPR System Family
Figure 5. 9500 MPR System Family
9500 MPR in the stand alone (zero-footprint) architecture is built by only one unit for Ethernet applications:
– Outdoor Unit.
– Outdoor Unit is connected to the MPLS metro networks equipment with one coaxial cable for the power supply and one Ethernet optical or electrical cable (with MPT).
9500 MPR in the split mount architecture is built by two separate units:
– MSS (Microwave Service Switch): indoor unit for split mount and stand alone configurations (Ether-net uplink)
– Outdoor Unit.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 35/308
2.1.2 Family elements described in this User Manual
In this User Manual the access solution with the MSS-1c and MPT-HC/MPT-MC is described:
The implemented radio configuration is 1+0.
The MSS-1c can collect up to 10 TDM flows and Ethernet flows.
The MSS-1c interfaces the Outdoor Unit (MPT-HC or MPT-MC) thanks to its Ethernet interface.
MPT-HC or MPT-MC is in a charge of transporting the flows in an efficient way (bandwidth optimization, Quality of service, respect to TDM contraints ....).
2.1.3 MSS-1c
The MSS-1c provides user port interface, cross-connection and switching management.
The cross-connection matrix implements all the cross-connections between the User ports (4 Ethernet ports and 10 E1 streams) and the Radio port. The matrix is a standard Ethernet switch, based on VLAN, assigned by the MCT.
The 10xE1 enter the LIU and then the IWF, which manages the encapsulation/reconstruction of PDH data to/from standard Ethernet packets and sends/receives standard Ethernet packets to/from the Ethernet switch.
The Radio Interface interfaces the MPT-HC or the MPT-MC. The radio interface is a standard GbEth inter-face electrical for MPT-MC, electrical or optical for MPT-HC. It sends/receives standard Ethernet packets to/from the Ethernet switch.
In case of electrical radio interface, on the same cable is also sent the power supply for the MPT by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (PFoE) function.
To connect MSS-1c and MPT-HC with only one electrical cable, the Power Extractor must be installed close to the MPT-HC. In this case the interconnection between the MSS-1c and the MPT-HC is made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (Ethernet traffic and Power Sup-ply on the same cable). The Power Extractor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately sent to the MPT-HC.
The MPT-HC can be connected also by using an optical cable for the Ethernet traffic and a coaxial cable for the power supply.
Note
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 136/308
2.1.4 MPT-HC
MPT-HC is a Microwave Equipment capable of transporting the Ethernet traffic over an RF radio channel.
MPT-HC is a microprocessor-controlled equipment that interfaces the MSS-1c with the antenna.
The input interface can be a standard electrical Giga Ethernet interface, connected to the Power Extractor as shown in Figure 8. or a standard optical Giga Ethernet interface, connected to the MSS-1c as shown in Figure 9..
The Ethernet traffic is transmitted over the radio channel according to the configured QoS and to the scheduler algorithms.
Transmitter circuits in the MPT-HC consist of Ethernet input interface, modulator, local oscillator, upcon-verter/mixer, power amplifier, and diplexer.
Receiver circuits consist of diplexer, low-noise amplifier, local oscillator, downconverter/mixer, automatic gain control, demodulator and Ethernet output interface.
The microprocessor manages the frequency, transmit power alarming, and performance monitoring.
The power is provided from the Power Extractor to the MPT-HC DC-DC converter through a dedicated power supply cable.
The MPT-HC is frequency dependent.
Figure 6. MPT-HC
2.1.5 MPT-MC
MPT-MC is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint. MPT-MC has limited capacity vs MPT-HC and is natively Ethernet powered (no Power Extractor is required).
Figure 7. MPT-MC
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 37/308
2.1.6 MSS-1c to MPT-HC interconnection
2.1.6.1 Electrical cable
One electrical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-HC.
The max cable length is 100 m.
The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site with the specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001).
Figure 8. MPT-HC connection (electrical cable)
With the MPT-HC the Power Extractor must be installed close to the MPT-HC. In this case the intercon-nection between the MSS-1c and the MPT-HC is made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the Power Feed over Ethernet (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply on the same cable). The Power Extrac-tor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately send to the MPT-HC.
Note
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 138/308
2.1.6.2 Optical cable
One optical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-HC.
The max cable length is 350 m.
A coaxial cable connects the MPT-HC to the MSS-1c (Figure 9) or to Station battery (Figure 10).
Figure 9. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to MSS-1c)
Figure 10. MPT-HC connection (optical cable + power supply cable to Station battery)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 39/308
2.1.7 MSS-1c to MPT-MC interconnection
One electrical Ethernet cable connects the MSS-1c to its MPT-MC.
The max cable length is 100 m.
The Ethernet electrical cable is provided with connectors to be mounted on site with the specific RJ45 tool (1AD160490001).
Figure 11. MPT-MC connection
2.1.8 Antennas
Antennas for direct mounting an MPT are available in diameters from 0.3 m to 1.8 m, depending on the frequency band.
A polarization rotator is included within the antenna collar, and direct-mounting equal or unequal loss couplers are available for single antenna protected operation.
Antenna mounts are designed for use on industry-standard 114 mm OD pipe-mounts.
An MPT can also be used with standard antennas via a remote-mount kit and flexible waveguide.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 140/308
2.2 Radio capacity, channelling and modulation (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
Table 1. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Static Modulation)
Channel Spacing(MHz)
FCM Mode ETSI Class # E1(TDM2TDM)
Typical Ethernet Throughput (1518 bytes)
3.5
QPSK 2 2 4,2 Mbit/s
8PSK 2 3 6,8 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 4 8,5 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 5 10,8 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 6 13,5 Mbit/s
7
QPSK 2 4 8,8 Mbit/s
8PSK 2 6 13,5 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 9 19,4 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 11 24,2 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 13 29,6 Mbit/s
128 QAM 5 16 35,4 Mbit/s
256 QAM (NB3) 6 19 40,6 Mbit/s
14
QPSK 2 9 19,9 Mbit/s
8PSK 2 14 30,0 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 19 40,7 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 23 50,3 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 29 62,0 Mbit/s
128 QAM 5 34 73,5 Mbit/s
256 QAM (NB3) 6 41 86,7 Mbit/s
28
QPSK 2 19 41,1 Mbit/s
QPSK 2 (NB1) 20 42,8 Mbit/s
8PSK 2 29 61,9 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 39 83,5 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 (NB1) 41 87,1 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 50 106,9 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 60 128,3 Mbit/s
128 QAM 5 71 151,8 Mbit/s
256 QAM (NB3) 6 85 180,0 Mbit/s
40 (NB2)64 QAM 5 88 186,0 Mbit/s
128 QAM 5 104 220,0 Mbit/s
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 41/308
N.B.1: New ETSI mask.
N.B.2: MPT-MC does not support this Channel Spacing.
N.B.3: MPT-MC does not support this FCM mode.
56 (NB2)
16 QAM 4 75 159,1 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 (NB1) 76 161,0 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 92 195,4 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 119 252,0 Mbit/s
128 QAM 5 141 298,0 Mbit/s
256 QAM 6 160 339,1 Mbit/s
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 142/308
Table 2. Radio capacity, channelling scheme and modulation (Adaptive Modulation)
Channel Spacing(MHz)
ACM ModeReference
ETSI Class Modulation range Typical EthernetThroughput(1518 bytes)
3.5QPSK 2 QPSK to 64 QAM 4,3 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 64 QAM 8,5 Mbit/s
7
QPSK 2 QPSK to 256 QAM 8,8 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 256 QAM 19,4 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 32 QAM to 256 QAM 24,2 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 256 QAM 29,6 Mbit/s
14
QPSK 2 QPSK to 256 QAM 19,9 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 256 QAM 40,7 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 32 QAM to 256 QAM 50,3 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 256 QAM 62,0 Mbit/s
28
QPSK 2 QPSK to 256 QAM 41,0 Mbit/s
QPSK 2U QPSK to 256 QAM 42,8 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 256 QAM 83,5 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4U 16 QAM to 256 QAM 87,1 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 32 QAM to 256 QAM 106,9 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 256 QAM 128,3 Mbit/s
40 (NB1) 64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 128 QAM 186,0 Mbit/s
56 (NB1)
16 QAM 4 16 QAM to 256 QAM 159,0 Mbit/s
16 QAM 4U 16 QAM to 256 QAM 161,0 Mbit/s
32 QAM 4 32 QAM to 256 QAM 195,4 Mbit/s
64 QAM 5 64 QAM to 256 QAM 251,9 Mbit/s
N.B.1: MPT-MC does not support this Channel Spacing.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 43/308
2.3 Standard Features
More radio and site scalability and flexibility for installation teams:
– Limited need for factory presetting channel frequency or bandwidth
– Supports cellular mobile networks, and microcellular network back and common carrier, private carrier and data networks, and utility haul applications.
– 2G, 2.5G, and 3G network compatible
– Outdoor Unit capacity and modulation independent
– Outdoor Unit can support either split-mount and full-outdoor architecture with the same hardware
– Flexible aggregate capacity sharing between E1 and Ethernet
– Adaptive packet transport that improves performance for priority services
– Output power agility
– ATPC
– Adaptive Modulation
– Packet-based internal cross-connect
– TDM MEF8 encapsulation
– Electrical GE interfaces
– Software-based configuration
– High Switching Capacity
2.4 Radio Configurations
In the current release the following radio configuration is available:
– 1+0 in split-mount
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 144/308
2.5 Typical System Configurations
– TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet (Figure 12.)
N.B. In this case a connected MPT is needed in order to configure the cross-connections.
– TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction (Figure 13.)
MSS-1c
Packet SW
10 E
1 TD
MIn
terfa
ce
Bui
lt-in
Eth
erne
t
Figure 12. TDM Over Ethernet Packet Node - Mapping of 10 E1 TDM on Ethernet
MSS-1c
Packet SW
10 E
1 TD
MIn
terfa
ce
Bui
lt-in
Eth
erne
t
RadioInterface
MPT
Figure 13. TDM and Ethernet Terminal Packet Transport 10 E1 TDM and 1 Radio Direction
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 45/308
2.6 Environmental and Electrical Characteristics
– General characteristics (MSS-1c) (par. 2.6.1)
– General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC) (par. 2.6.2)
– MPT-MC characteristics (par. 2.6.3)
– MPT-HC characteristics (par. 2.6.4)
– Radio performances (par. 2.6.5)
– General characteristics (Power Extractor) (par. 2.6.6)
2.6.1 General characteristics (MSS-1c)
Power Injector
Input Voltage range -38.4 to -57.6 Vdc
Standards Compliance (Power Injector)
EMC EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4, EN 55022 Class B
Stationary use ETS 300 019 1-3, Class 3.2
Storage ETS 300 019 2-1, Class 1.2
Transportation ETS 300 019 2-2, Class 2.3
Safety EN 60950
Environmental
Operating Temperature -20° to +50° C (without FAN unit)-20° to +65° C (with FAN unit)
Cold start-up -40° C
Humidity 0 to 95%, non condensing
Management
Protocol SNMP
Interface, electrical Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T
Interface, electrical physical RJ-45
Routing Protocols supported Static routing
Network Management Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMSAlcatel-Lucent 1352 CompactAlcatel-Lucent 5620 SAM
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 146/308
2.6.2 General characteristics (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
General with MPT-HC
Operating Frequency Range 6 - 38 GHz
Max. Ethernet throughput 340 Mbps
Bandwidth up to 56 MHz
Modulation Options in FCM QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, 256 QAM
Adaptive Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, 256 QAM
General with MPT-MC
Operating Frequency Range 6 - 38 GHz
Max. Ethernet throughput 155 Mbps
Bandwidth up to 28 MHz
Modulation Options in FCM QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM
Adaptive Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM
Radio Path Protection Options
Non Protected, 1+0
Standards Compliance (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
EMC EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4, EN 55022 Class B
Stationary use ETS 300 019, Class 4.1
Storage ETS 300 019, Class 1.2
Transportation ETS 300 019, Class 2.3
Safety IEC 60950-1/EN 60950-1
Radio Frequency EN 302 217 Classes 2, 4 & E5
Water Ingress IEC 60529 (IPX6)
Environmental
Operating Temperature(Guaranteed)
-33° to +55° C
Start up temperature from low temperature
-40° C
Humidity(Guaranteed)
0 to 100%
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 47/308
2.6.3 MPT-MC characteristics
2.6.3.1 6 to 13 GHz
System
Frequency Range, GHz 5.925 - 6.425
6.425 - 7.11
7.125 - 7.9
7.725 - 8.5
10.7 - 11.7
12.75 - 13.25
T-R Spacings supported MHz 252.04 340 154-161-168-196
119-126-294-305-311-32
490-500-530
266
Antenna Interface
Waveguide Type WR137 WR137 WR112 WR113 WR75 WR62
Typical power consumption 38 W
Guaranteed power consumption
2.6.3.2 15 to 38 GHz
System
Frequency Range, GHz 14.4 - 15.35
17.7 - 19.7
21.2 - 23.632
24.52 - 26.483
37.0 - 39.46
T-R Spacings supported MHz 420- 490 1008-1010- 1560
1008- 1050-1200-1232
1008 1260
Antenna Interface
Waveguide Type WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28
Typical power consumption 38 W
Guaranteed power consumption
L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz
40 W
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
40 W
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 148/308
2.6.4 MPT-HC characteristics
2.6.4.1 6 to 13 GHz
System
Frequency Range, GHz 5.925 - 6.425
6.425 - 7.11
7.125 - 7.9
7.725 - 8.5
10.7 - 11.7
12.75 - 13.25
T-R Spacings supported MHz 252.04 340 154, 161, 168, 196,
245
119; 126; 151.614;
208; 213,5;
266; 294; 305;
311.32
490-530 266
Antenna Interface
Waveguide Type WR137 WR137 WR112 WR113 WR75 WR62
Typical power consumption 38 W
Guaranteed power consumption
2.6.4.2 15 to 38 GHz
System
Frequency Range, GHz 14.4 - 15.35
17.7 - 19.7
21.2 - 23.632
24.52 - 26.483
37.0 - 39.46
T-R Spacings supported MHz 308-315-322, 420, 490, 644,
728
1008-1010,
1560, 340
1008- 1050-1200-1232
1008 1260
Antenna Interface
Waveguide Type WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28
Typical power consumption 38 W
Guaranteed power consumption
2.6.5 Radio performances
The radio performances are provided in the “Technical Description” document.
L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz
42 W
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
42 W
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 49/308
2.6.6 General characteristics (Power Extractor)
Standards Compliance (Power Extractor)
EMC EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4, EN 55022 Class B
Stationary use ETS 300 019 2-4, Class 4M5 sinusoidal, random and shock
Storage ETS 300 019, Class 1.3
Transportation ETS 300 019 2-2, Class 2.3
Safety EN 60950
Environmental
Operating Temperature(Guaranteed)
-33° to +55° C
Start up temperature from low temperature
-40° C
Humidity(Guaranteed)
0 to 100%
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 150/308
2.7 Parts Lists
2.7.1 MSS-1c
Table 3. MSS-1c item codes
APR Name APR Code Remarks
MSS-1c 3DB18613AAXX
Fan unit 3DB77002AAXX To be installed if the ambient temperature is higher than 50°C
SFP 1000Base-Lx 1AB187280040 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)
SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB187280045 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)
SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB383760001 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)
SFP 1000base-T 1AB359780001 To be installed in the Ethernet user port 3 or 4 (option)
Table 4. CD-ROM Software codes
APR Name APR Code
TCO Software Suite Rel 4.2 CD-ROM 3DB75013AAXX
SWP MPR-E Rel 2.2 PACKET CD-ROM 3DB18723ACXX
SWP MPR-E Rel 2.2 HYBRID CD-ROM 3DB18722ACXX
9500 MPR Rel 2.2User Manual CD-ROM EN
3DB18783AAXX
2.7.2 MPT-HC optical interface option
Table 5. MPT-HC option
APR Name APR Code Remarks
SFP 1000Base-Sx 1AB 38376 0001 Optical SFP module to be installed optionally in the MPT-HC to provide the optical Giga Ethernet interface
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 51/308
2.7.3 MPT-HC with internal diplexer
Table 6. MPT-HC codes with internal diplexer
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
L6 252 1 3DB20441ABXX 5930-6049
1P 3DB20443ABXX 6182-6302
2 3DB20442ABXX 6048-6168
2P 3DB20444ABXX 6301-6420
U6 340 1 3DB20437ABXX 6420-6600
1P 3DB20439ABXX 6760-6940
2 3DB20438ABXX 6565-6745
2P 3DB20440ABXX 6905-7085
3 3DB20464ABXX 6595-6775
3P 3DB20465ABXX 6935-7115
11 530-490 1 3DB20371ABXX 10695-10955
1P 3DB20547ABXX 11205-11485
2 3DB20546ABXX 10935-11205
2P 3DB20548ABXX 11445-11705
13 266 1 3DB20372ABXX 12750-12865
1P 3DB20420ABXX 13016-13131
2 3DB20419ABXX 12861-12980
2P 3DB20421ABXX 13127-13246
15 308-315-322 1 3DB20466ABXX 14630-14766
1P 3DB20468ABXX 14945-15081
2 3DB20467ABXX 14759-14899
2P 3DB20469ABXX 15074-15215
420-475 1 3DB20373ABXX 14500-14724
1P 3DB20423ABXX 14920-15144
420 2 3DB20422ABXX 14710-14941
2P 3DB20424ABXX 15130-15361
490 1 3DB20425ABXX 14400-14635
1P 3DB20427ABXX 14890-15125
2 3DB20426ABXX 14625-14860
2P 3DB20428ABXX 15115-15350
640-644-728 1 3DB20448ABXX 14500-14700
1P 3DB20449ABXX 15144-15348
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 152/308
18 1560 1 3DB20432ABXX 17700-18140
1P 3DB20433ABXX 19260-19700
340 1 3DB20549ABXX 18581-18700
1P 3DB20551ABXX 18920-19040
2 3DB20550ABXX 18701-18820
2P 3DB20552ABXX 19040-19160
1008-1010 1 3DB20374ABXX 17700-18201
1P 3DB20430ABXX 18710-19211
2 3DB20429ABXX 18180-18690
2P 3DB20431ABXX 19190-19700
23 1200-1232 1 3DB20473ABXX 21198-21819
1P 3DB20475ABXX 22400-23019
1050-1200-1232 2 3DB20474ABXX 21781-22400
2P 3DB20476ABXX 22981-23600
1008 1 3DB20375ABXX 22000-22315
1P 3DB20471ABXX 23008-23323
2 3DB20470ABXX 22300-22600
2P 3DB20472ABXX 23308-23608
25 1008 1 3DB20376ABXX 24540-24997
1P 3DB20554ABXX 25548-26005
2 3DB20553ABXX 24994-25448
2P 3DB20555ABXX 26002-26456
38 1260 1 3DB20458ABXX 37050-37620
1P 3DB20460ABXX 38310-38880
2 3DB20459ABXX 37619-38180
2P 3DB20461ABXX 38879-39440
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 53/308
2.7.4 MPT-MC with internal diplexer
Table 7. MPT-MC codes with internal diplexer
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
L6 252 1 3DB20838AAXX 5930-6049
1P 3DB20840AAXX 6182-6302
2 3DB20839AAXX 6048-6168
2P 3DB20841AAXX 6301-6420
11 490-530 1 3DB20874AAXX 10695-10955
1P 3DB20876AAXX 11205-11485
2 3DB20875AAXX 10935-11205
2P 3DB20877AAXX 11445-11705
13 266 1 3DB20818AAXX 12750-12865
1P 3DB20820AAXX 13016-13131
2 3DB20819AAXX 12861-12980
2P 3DB20821AAXX 13127-13246
15 420-475 1 3DB20822AAXX 14500-14724
1P 3DB20824AAXX 14920-15144
420 2 3DB20823AAXX 14710-14941
2P 3DB20825AAXX 15130-15361
490 1 3DB20826AAXX 14400-14635
1P 3DB20828AAXX 14890-15125
2 3DB20827AAXX 14625-14860
2P 3DB20829AAXX 15115-15350
18 1560 1 3DB20864AAXX 17700-18140
1P 3DB20865AAXX 19260-19700
1008-1010 1 3DB20860AAXX 17700-18201
1P 3DB20862AAXX 18710-19211
2 3DB20861AAXX 18180-18690
2P 3DB20863AAXX 19190-19700
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 154/308
23 1200-1232 1 3DB20834AAXX 21198-21819
1P 3DB20836AAXX 22400-23019
1050-1200-1232 2 3DB20835AAXX 21781-22400
2P 3DB20837AAXX 22981-23600
1008 1 3DB20830AAXX 22000-22315
1P 3DB20832AAXX 23008-23323
2 3DB20831AAXX 22300-22600
2P 3DB20833AAXX 23308-23608
25 1008 1 3DB20854AAXX 24540-24997
1P 3DB20856AAXX 25548-26005
2 3DB20855AAXX 24994-25448
2P 3DB20857AAXX 26002-26456
38 1260 1 3DB20870AAXX 37050-37620
1P 3DB20872AAXX 38310-38880
2 3DB20871AAXX 37619-38180
2P 3DB20873AAXX 38879-39440
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 55/308
2.7.5 MPT-HC/MPT-MC with external diplexer (7/8 GHz)
The diplexer included in the available BRANCHING assemblies refers to ITU–R F.385, 386 and RF special CUSTOMERS channelling with Tx/Rx separation specified in following Table 10. and Table 13. Each diplexer is a 3-port passive device with two band–pass filters as described hereafter.
Each BRANCHING assembly has two different variants by duplex spacing, depending on the RF_Tx out-put frequency band as described on the table below:
3DB Variant Channel
3DB xxxxx AAXX 1_1p
3DB xxxxx ABXX 2_2p
The arrangement between each filters on the same branching device is described below:
WARNING: f1, f2, f3 and f4 frequencies of the branching filters refer to the extreme channel frequencies and not to the cut–off frequencies of the filters.
Table 8. 7 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer
Table 9. 7 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
7/8 NA Lower 3DB20858AAXX 7107 - 8370
Upper 3DB20859AAXX 7261 - 8496
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
7/8 NA Lower 3DB20454ADXX 7107 - 8370
Upper 3DB20456ADXX 7261 - 8496
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 156/308
Table 10. 7 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)
154 7212,0 7107,0 7163,0 7261,0 7317,0 3DB 10060 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 154_C MHz
154 7547,0 7428,0 7512,0 7582,0 7666,0 3DB 06774 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 154_A MHz
154 7603,0 7484,0 7568,0 7638,0 7722,0 3DB 06774 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH. 154_A MHz
154 7561,0 7442,0 7526,0 7596,0 7680,03DB 06775 AAXX
... CH1–1P P.SH.154_B MHz
160 7561,0 7442,0 7520,0 7602,0 7680,0 ... CH1–1P P.SH.160 MHz
154 7617,0 7498,0 7582,0 7652,0 7736,03DB 06775 ABXX
... CH2–2P P.SH.154_B MHz
160 7617,0 7498,0 7576,0 7658,0 7736,0 ... CH2–2P P.SH.160 MHz
161 7240,0 7124,5 7194,5 7285,5 7355,5 3DB 06780 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_A MHz
161 7310,0 7194,5 7264,5 7355,5 7425,5 3DB 06780 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_A MHz
161 7365,0 7249,5 7319,5 7410,5 7480,5 3DB 06781 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_B MHz
161 7435,0 7319,5 7389,5 7480,5 7550,5 3DB 06781 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_B MHz
161 7390,0 7274,5 7344,5 7435,5 7505,5 3DB 06782 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_C MHz
161 7460,0 7344,5 7414,5 7505,5 7575,5 3DB 06782 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_C MHz
161 7540,0 7424,5 7494,5 7585,5 7655,5 3DB 06783 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_D MHz
161 7610,0 7494,5 7564,5 7655,5 7725,5 3DB 06783 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_D MHz
161 7665,0 7549,5 7619,5 7710,5 7780,5 3DB 06784 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_E MHz
161 7735,0 7619,5 7689,5 7780,5 7850,5 3DB 06784 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_E MHz
161 7690,0 7574,5 7644,5 7735,5 7805,5 3DB 06785 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.161_F MHz
161 7760,0 7644,5 7714,5 7805,5 7875,5 3DB 06785 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.161_F MHz
168 7299,0 7187,0 7243,0 7355,0 7411,0 3DB 10059 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.168_B MHZ
168 7569,0 7443,0 7527,0 7611,0 7695,0 3DB 06776 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.168 MHZ
168 7625,0 7499,0 7583,0 7667,0 7751,0 3DB 06776 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.168 MHZ
182 7547,0 7414,0 7498,0 7596,0 7680,0 3DB 06777 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.182 MHZ
182 7603,0 7470,0 7554,0 7652,0 7736,0 3DB 06777 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.182 MHZ
196 7247,0 7107,0 7191,0 7303,0 7387,0 3DB 06778 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.196 MHZ
196 7303,0 7163,0 7247,0 7359,0 7443,0 3DB 06778 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.196 MHZ
245 7606,5 7428,0 7540,0 7673,0 7785,0 3DB 06779 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.245 MHZ
245 7718,5 7540,0 7652,0 7785,0 7897,0 3DB 06779 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.245 MHZ
N.B. Shifter value choice to be done by Craft Terminal.
Shifter MHz
Central Freq. MHz
Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band)
Filter 2 MHz(Upper Band) BRANCHING ASSEMBLY
Low Limit f1
High Limit f2
Low Limit f3
High Limit f4 APR codes Technical Description
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 57/308
Table 11. 8 GHz MPT-MC codes with external diplexer
Table 12. 8 GHz MPT-HC codes with external diplexer
Table 13. 8 GHz Branching assemblies (for MPT-HC and MPT-MC)
119 8366.5 8286.0 8328.0 8405.0 8447.03DB 06789 AAXX
... CH1–1P P.SH.119 MHz
126 8366.5 8282.5 8324.5 8408.5 8450.5 ... CH1–1P P.SH.126 MHz
119 8408.5 8328.0 8370.0 8447.0 8489.03DB 06789 ABXX
... CH2–2P P.SH.119 MHz
126 8408.5 8324.5 8366.5 8450.5 8492.5 ... CH2–2P P.SH.126 MHz
151.614 8315.010 8204.217 8274.189 8355.831 8425.803 3DB 06787 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.151 MHz
151.614 8384.982 8274.189 8344.161 8425.803 8495.775 3DB 06787 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.151 MHz
208 8217.0 8064.0 8162.0 8272.0 8370.0 3DB 10073 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.208 MHZ
208 8301.0 8148.0 8246.0 8356.0 8454.0 3DB 10073 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.208 MHZ
266 8097.5 7905.0 8024.0 8171.0 8290.0 3DB 06788 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH.266 MHZ
266 8209.5 8017.0 8136.0 8283.0 8402.0 3DB 06788 ABXX ... CH2–2P P.SH.266 MHZ
294.440
7947.835
7749.755
7851.475 8044.195
8145.915
3DB 06786 AAXX ... CH1–1PP.SH.294/305/311 MHZ305.560 7738.635 8157.035
311.320 7732.875 8162.795
311.320 8066.435 7851.475
7970.075
8162.795 8281.395
3DB 06786 ABXX ... CH2–2PP.SH.294/305/311 MHZ294.440
8063.7407862.965
8157.4058264.515
305.560 7851.845 8275.635
213.5 8147.0 8035.0 8046.0 8248.0 8259.0 3DB 10103 AAXX ... CH1–1P P.SH. 213.5 MHZ
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
7/8 NA Lower 3DB20858AAXX 7107 - 8370
Upper 3DB20859AAXX 7261 - 8496
Band (GHz) Shifter (MHz) Tx sub-band APR codes Tx frequency (MHz)
7/8 NA Lower 3DB20454ADXX 7107 - 8370
Upper 3DB20456ADXX 7261 - 8496
Shifter MHz
Central Freq. MHz
Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band)
Filter 2 MHz(Upper Band)
BRANCHING ASSEMBLY
Low Limit f1
High Limit f2
Low Limit f3
High Limit f4 APR codes Technical Description
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 158/308
2.8 Functional description
2.8.1 MSS-1c (Indoor Unit)
The MSS-1c incorporates the base–band processing and also radio interface functionalities only when MPT-HC or MPT-MC is connected. MSS-1c offers tributaries interfaces as well as supervision.
The MSS-1c radio is frequency–independent.
MSS-1c
PFoE
ETHERNETSWITCH
4x10/100/1000Ethernet ports
LIU IWF8
2
HK (*)
8E1
2E1
E1 INTERFACEMPT1 (optical interface)
MPT2 (optical interface)
MPT1 (electrical interf.)
MPT2 (electrical interf.)
Powersupply
LIGHTINGPROTECTION PSU
FPGA
FAN unit connector
LCT RJ45NMS1 RJ45
RA
DIO
INTE
RFA
CE
NMS2 RJ45
(*)
(*)
Figure 14. MSS-1c block diagram
(*) Not supported in the current release.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 59/308
Optical SFP tobe installed toconnect oneMPT-HC
(*)
E1 Connector (9-10)
E1 Connector (1-8)
User Ethernet ports (3-4) (Note 1)
User Ethernet ports (1-2)
RJ45 CTconnector
RJ45 HouseKeeping connector (*)
(*)RJ45 NMS2connector
RJ45 NMS1connector
RJ45 connector to MPT1
(MPT-HC or MPT-MC)
6 LEDs (Note 2)
Power supplyconnector
Figure 15. MSS-1c front view
(*) Not supported in the current release.
To power supply the FAN unit, if installed.
Figure 16. MSS-1c rear view
Note 1: To use the User Ethernet Ports 3 and 4 an SFP plug-in (electrical or optical) must be installed.
Note 2: The meaning of the six LEDs is: – LED M: Major Alarm (red)– LED m: Minor Alarm (red) (not supported in the current release: permanently OFF)– LED W: Warning (yellow) (not supported in the current release: permanently OFF)– LED A: Abnormal condition (yellow)– LED MPT1: MPT Status (green/red/yellow)– LED MPT2: not supportedLED A is ON in the following conditions:– Tx Power muted by operator– ACM frozen by operator– MPT loopback activeLED MPT1 can be:– GREEN: MPT is emitting power as expected according the known configuration– YELLOW: MPT is not emitting power due to a forced Squelch condition– RED: MPT is ABNORMALLY emitting power– SWITCHED OFF: MPT is not emitting power according with the known configurationAt start-up the MSS-1c:– lights on all the alarm LEDs (Major, Minor, Warning and Abnormal)– lights on the MPT LED as yellow, then this LED will be GREEN, RED or YELLOW, as
explained above.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 160/308
2.8.1.1 External User Interface
– 2 traffic 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces for data and service traffic via RJ45 connector.
– 2 SFP ready to accept optical 1000Base-LX/SX SFP or Electrical 1000Base-T SFP.
– 2x 10/100 Ethernet NMS interfaces for connection of TMN on RJ45 connector
– 1 Local Craft terminal interface 10/100 Ethernet allows the straight connection to MPT remote Con-troller via RJ45 connector
– 10 E1 bi-directional interfaces on 2 subD connectors
– 4 In housekeeping for external alarms collections, RJ45 connector + 2 IN/OUT (not supported)
– 9 poles SubD Connector in the rear side for FAN unit feed/control.
2.8.1.2 Power supply
The MSS-1c receives the Battery input through 1 power connector mounted on the front panel.
The input voltage range is from -38.4 V to -57.6 Vdc.
2.8.1.3 Ethernet switch
The switch provides the following features:
– Address learning up to 8K Mac address and static entries,
– Standard 802.1Q management (VLAN),
– Layer2 switching (MAC Address),
– 2 QoS per port (802.1P and DiffServ)
– Flexible output scheduler: SP (strict priority), DWRR (deficit weighted round robin).
2.8.1.4 E1 Interface
The E1 Interface performs the following macro functions:
– Termination of 10 E1 signals (10 E1 bi-directional interfaces according ITU-T G.703 on the front panel)
– Encapsulation/Extraction of those PDH data flows into/from standard Ethernet packets Inter Working Function
– Reconstruction of the original PDH Timing meeting G823/824 Req.
– Sending/getting those std Ethernet packets to the Ethernet switch
– Communication with the Controller for provisioning and status report.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 61/308
2.8.1.5 MPT Interface
The MPT Interface is the interface for one MPT: MPT-HC or MPT-MC.
The connection to the MPT-HC or MPT-MC can be realized by using:
– only one electrical Ethernet cable with the PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) function (Ethernet traf-fic + Power Supply on the same cable) (For the MPT-HC the DC Extractor must be used).
The connection to the MPT-HC can also be realised by using:
– 1 cable (electrical/optical Ethernet) + 1 cable for the Power Supply.
Main Functions
– Provide the power supply interface and the Ethernet interface
– Provide the Power Feed over Ethernet function
– Lightning and surge protection
– Ethernet and power interface supervision
– Clock distribution function
– Ethernet link quality monitor function
– Communication with Controller for provisioning and status report.
2.8.1.6 Ethernet User Interface
The following 4 Ethernet User Interfaces are available:
– 2 traffic 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces for data and service traffic via RJ45 connector.
– 2 SFP ready to accept optical 1000Base-LX/SX SFP or Electrical 1000Base-T SFP.
The User port 2 and port 4 (in Optical mode) can be used as SynchE synchronization.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 162/308
2.8.2 Fan unit
An optional Fan unit must be used to dissipate the MSS-1c in special case when the ambient temperature is > +50°C.
Figure 17. shows the installation position: the MSS-1c on the right and the Fan unit on the left.
The MSS-1c and the Fan unit are mounted on a bracket compatible with 19" rack. Height is 1.3U.
The Fan unit is powered by the MSS-1c with a cable placed on the rear side. The cable is provided with the Fan unit.
The Fan unit includes two fans.
One bi-color LED on the front panel gives the status of the Fan unit:
– Fans alarm = OFF <-> LED = green
– Fans alarm = ON <-> LED = red
Figure 17. MSS-1c and Fan unit
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 63/308
2.8.3 MPT-HC
MPT-HC (Microwave Packet Transport) is a Microwave Equipment capable to transport the Ethernet traf-fic over an RF radio channel.
The MPT-HC includes a waveguide antenna port, a type-N female connector for the DC connection, a maintenance connector (with captive protection cap) for RSSI access, 1 electrical or optical GE interface and a grounding stud.
N.B. The 1 GE interface for RPS is not used.
The MPT-HC can be installed on an integrated antenna or on standard poles, wall or pedestal mount, with an appropriate fastening system.
The MPT-HC (with a solar shield) incorporates the complete RF transceiver and can be associated with an integrated or separate antenna.
The cabinet is a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 67) container, designed to be compatible with hot and very sunny climatic zones.
The MPT-HC can be rapidly installed on standard poles with an appropriate fastening system. The pole mounting is the same from 6 to 38 GHz.
The MPT-HC is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows to change the MPT-HC without alter-ing antenna pointing.
For 6 GHz & 7/8 GHz, the MPT-HC polarization is determined by the rotation of the MPT-HC in 1+0 con-figuration.
For 11 GHz to 38 GHz, the MPT-HC polarization is determined by the rotation of the polarization rotator fitted in the antenna port of the MPT-HC in 1+0 configuration.
Three mechanical solutions are adopted:
[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[2] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation and different mechanics from 11-38 GHz (6 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[3] with external diplexer: due to a very high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-HC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-HC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 164/308
MPT-HC is broken down to the following sections:
– MPT-CB: Common Belt section. This section is Frequency independent, and all the features relevant to this unit are common to all the MPT RF options.
– MPT-RF: Radio Frequency section that is frequency dependent.
Figure 18. MPT system
The MPT-HC interface is based on a Gb Ethernet, that can be either optical or electrical depending on the needs and the cable length. If the optical port has/have to be used (data and/or RPS port), the cor-responfing SFP plug-in must be installed by opening the Cobox.
N.B. In the current release the RPS port is not used.
Figure 19. 11-38 GHz MPT-HC housing
Figure 20. 6 GHz MPT-HC housing
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 65/308
Figure 21. 7-8 GHz MPT-HC housing
2.8.3.1 MPT-HC block diagram
Figure 22. MPT-HC block diagram
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 166/308
2.8.3.1.1 Common Belt section
The Common Belt section is frequency independent. It is the digital section of the MPT-HC.
The main functions are the following:
1) Interfaces the MSS for traffic transport and MSS communication messages in both directions, through one Gigabit Ethernet optical or electrical cable.
2) Micro-Processor for
– Indoor - MPT-HC dialogue – HW configuration and monitoring of all MPT-HC parts– Dynamic regulation process such as ATPC
3) Transport of the system reference clock (synchronisation)
4) Switches the traffic and management to the correct port (processor port, radio port)
5) Performs traffic adaptation if needed
6) Performs Quality of Service and policing on flow to be sent over the radio link.
7) Modulation and demodulation of the resulting modem frame
Power supply interface
It is provided by a "N" 50 ohms connector, with the positive to ground.
The power supply is coming from the MSS in the range of -40,5 V to -58 V. MPT-HC input voltage range is from -28 V to -58 V.
Lightning protection
The lightning protection is internal to the MPT-HC. No external protection must be used.
This protection applies to:
– the Ethernet electrical cables
– the power supply coax cable
INCA module
The INCA module hosts the physical electrical Ethernet interface.
Tx Side
Following the flow from user Ethernet port to radio, the section performs:
– Reception of incoming Ethernet frames from the optical or electrical user interface (through INCA)
– Recovery of the clock coming from the MSS
– Switch of the management frames from user port to internal processor
– Generation of MPT-HC to MPT-HC messages needed for radio link (ATPC, ACM, ...)
– Compression of the TDMoEth frames header (TDM2TDM - MEF8, TDM2ETH - MEF8)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 67/308
– Management of the Quality of Service
– Fragmentation of the Ethernet frames
– Shaping of the traffic to adapt it to radio bandwidth
– Tx Modem frame building
– Tx Radio frame building (FEC, pilots, ...)
– Synchronisation of the symbol rate to the MSS recovered clock
– Modulation in I and Q analogue signals to be sent to the RF section.
Rx Side
Following the flow from radio to user Ethernet port, the section performs:
– Reception of the I and Q analogue signals coming from the RF section
– Demodulation of the Rx radio frame into Rx modem frame
– Deframing of the Rx modem frame
– Re-assembly of fragmented Ethernet frame
– Decompression of TDMoEth frames header
– Extraction of MPT-HC to MPT-HC messages needed for radio link (ATPC, ACM, ...)
– Management of service channels frames
– Switch of the management frames from internal processor to user port.
– Send the recovered clock to the MSS
2.8.3.1.2 RF Section
There are two architectures, the difference between these two architectures are only on Rx side:
– For the first one (used in MPT-HC band 7/8 GHz) there are only two frequency conversions between RF input frequency and base band frequency
– For the second one (used for all other MPT-HC bands) there are three frequency conversions
The block diagrams of these two architectures are shown hereafter.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 168/308
Figure 23. 7/8 GHz MPT-HC architecture
Figure 24. 11 to 38 GHz MPT-HC architecture
Main Functions
1. TX block:
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 69/308
• IF TX Quadrature modulator
• IF_Tx Synthesizer
• RF Up-Converter
• Output power management
2. Tx_Rx Common block:
• RF_LO Synthesizer
3. Rx block:
• LNA
• RF Down Converter
• First IF amplification and overload management
• First IF down conversion
• Second IF amplification and filtering (not present in 7/8 GHz)
• Quadrature demodulator
• Base band filter and AGC loop
Tx Side
I Q Base Band and TX_IF
The two inputs (I and Q), coming from the Common Belt section, are filtered in two seven poles butterworth low-pass filters to attenuate high frequency components of the base band signal. Depending of channel bandwidth it is possible to select two different filters with cut-off frequency of 13.8MHz or 61.5 MHz.
An integrated I Q modulator is used to combine the two output signals of the filters with the IF output signal TX_IF_LO to obtain modulated carrier.
TX_IF_LO signal is a low phase noise signal generated with an integrated Synthesizer in the frequency range 1650 -2200 MHz with a step of 250 KHz.
An amplifier and an additional low pass filter at the end of IF TX stage permit to obtain correct level and low-level harmonics at the input of the Tx RF mixer.
TX_RF
The Tx IF signal is up converted in an RF mixer to obtain the correct RF output frequency range.
The RF LO used by the mixer is obtained by the multiplication of the output signal of an RF synthesizer.
The output signal of the mixer is filtered before to enter in the RF AGC loop including variable attenuators, amplifiers and power detector. This AGC loop is controlled to obtain the specified output level power range.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 170/308
Rx Side
RX_RF
The input signal is amplified in a low noise variable gain amplifier, after there is a down-converter stage that translates the input signal to the first IF frequency.
The local oscillator used for the translation is the same phase locked RF synthesizer that is used for Tx up-conversion.
Frequency range of first IF is in the range 2 to 3.5 GHz.
RX_IF
At the input of Rx_IF stage there is a variable attenuator used to attenuate the RX_IF level in case of over-load input level to prevent intermodulation of the next stages.
After the variable attenuator there is a power level detector used to manage RF Gain and RX IF attenuator in function of total power in large bandwidth.
After there is a second down conversion stage (not used in 7/8 GHz) that permit to translate the frequency to a fixed IF of 1080 MHz (13 and 15 GHz MPT-HC case) or 840 MHz (18 to 38 GHz MPT-HC case).
The RX_IF LO used for IF translation is generated with an integrated synthesizer in the frequency range 3300 to 4400 MHz with 500 KHz or 2000 KHz step.
N.B. In 7/8 GHz MPT-HC the RF input is directly converted to fixed IF of 2100 MHz after the first RX RF mixer.
This fixed IF is filtered in a pass-band Filter to improve carrier to noise ratio and interferer protection of the next high gain stage.
RX Base band
The fixed IF is transposed to a base band signal with an IQ quadrature demodulator.
This demodulator used the RX_BB_LO signal of an integrated synthesizer, the center frequency of this synthesizer is: 1900 (6, 7/8GHz ODU) / 2140 MHz (7/8 GHz ODU), 1080 MHz (11 to15 GHz RF) or 840 MHz (18 to 38 GHz RF).
After each I Q outputs of the demodulator there is four switchable low-pass butterworth filters that are cho-sen in function of bit rate modulation (Anti-aliasing Rx filter).
At the end of the base band stage on each I Q channel there is a variable gain amplifier controlled by the PWM signals coming from the Common Belt section.
This AGC loop permits to have a constant level at the Rx Base band output.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 71/308
2.8.3.2 RSSI Monitoring Point
The RSSI is available on a connector used to manually point the antenna on the field.
The higher the voltage the higher RSSI and better aligned the antenna is. To measure the RSL is used a voltmeter connected to the MPT by using a service kit cable.
Table 14. RSSI Table
Units Measurement (with MPT-HC)
Service kit cable (Vdc)
5 4.71 4.12 3.5 2.9 2.3 1.71 1.11 0.59 0.14
RSL (dBm) -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100
2.8.3.3 Waveguide Flange Data
Table 15. Waveguide Flange Data
Waveguide Type
L6 GHz
U6GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
26 GHz
38 GHz
WR137 WR137 WR113 WR113 WR75 WR62 WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 172/308
2.8.4 Power Extractor
The Power Extractor is an Outdoor Device, to be installed close to the MPT-HC, which receives on one cable the “Power Feed over Ethernet” (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply), provided by the Power Injector, and separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic to be separately sent to the MPT-HC.
Figure 25. shows the Power Extractor.
Figure 25. Power Extractor
The Power Extractor has 3 connectors:
– DC+DATA In (PFoE from the Power Injector)
– DC Out (Power Supply to MPT-HC)
– Data Out (Ethernet traffic to MPT-HC)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 73/308
2.8.5 MPT-MC
MPT-MC is similar to MPT-HC from architecture standpoint. MPT-MC has limited capacity vs MPT-HC and is natively Ethernet powered (no Power Extractor is required).
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:
[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (6 GHz and from 11 GHz to 38 GHz), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[2] with external diplexer: due to a vary high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.
Figure 26. 6 GHz and from 11 to 38 GHz MPT-MC housing
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 174/308
Figure 27. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC housing
2.8.6 Radio Transmission Features with MPT-HC/MPT-MC
2.8.6.1 Frequency Agility
The Frequency Agility feature gives the Operator the possibility to set via MCT the frequency of a single Transceiver within a chosen sub–band to select the RF working channel. This implies benefits for spare parts, order processing and frequency co–ordination.
2.8.6.2 Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)
The Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) function automatically increases or decreases the trans-mit output power upon request from the opposite terminal. The opposite terminal constantly monitors Receive Signal Level (RSL), receive signal quality, and aggregate Bit Error Rate (BER) of the receive sig-nal.
When the ATPC is Enabled the transmit output will remain at it's lowest level until a fade occurs (or a receive circuit alarm is detected). When the change in RSL is detected at the receive end, a command is sent to the transmit end to increase power in 1 dB steps to it's highest level. After the fade is over, the receive end commands the transmit power to decreases in 1 dB steps to the lowest level.
The ATPC range (high and low limits) is variable, determined by link distance, link location, and link fre-quency. When ATPC Enabled is checked, the range values are shown in parenthesis (minimum - maxi-mum) following ATPC Range.
When the ATPC is disabled the transmit output will always operate at the power value set by the MCT.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 75/308
2.8.6.3 Transmitted power control: RTPC function
The capability to adjust the transmitted power in a static and fixed way (RTPC = Remote Transmit Power Control) has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which due to the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally through MCT.
The Output power is band and modulation dependent.
2.8.6.4 Power Monitoring
The MPT-HC incorporates a detector for Tx power measurement. It is used to provide measurement of forward power as a performance parameter, and to provide a calibration input for transmitter operation over temperature and output range.
Viewed Tx power ranges always match the capabilities of the MPT-HC for a given modulation. When modulation is changed, the CT automatically adjusts/restricts Tx Power to be within valid range.
2.8.6.5 Adaptive Equalization
Adaptive equalization (AE) is employed to improve reliability of operation under dispersive fade conditions, typically encountered over long and difficult paths.
This is achieved through a multi-tap equalizer consisting of two registers, one with feed-forward taps, the other with feed-back taps. Each of these registers multiply successive delayed samples of the received signal by weighting-coefficients to remove propagation induced inter-symbol interference.
2.8.6.6 Link identifier
The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas puts the problem of possible interferences during installation and turn-on phase.
The digital frame incorporates link identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.
In case of “Link Identifier Mismatch” all the traffic is dropped.
The Link identifier management can be enabled or disabled by the management systems.
2.8.6.7 Loopbacks
To facilitate the installation/commissioning and the remote maintenance two loopbacks are available.
As the activation of a loopback affects the traffic, the presence of a loopback is indicated to the management systems as an abnormal condition.
The supported loopbacks are shown in the following figure.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 176/308
Figure 28. Available loopbacks
The following loopbacks are provided by the MPT-HC or MPT-MC:
1) Line Side loopback: this loopback routes data from the output of the Tx Data Awareness block (after compression) to the input of the Rx data awareness (decompression). This is an internal loopback. It is a Loop and Continue. It is possible to enable this loopback only at aggregate level. When this loopback is activated the behavior is the following:
– TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to MSS-1c with source and desti-nation MAC address swapped. For TDM2ETH flows the loopback works only if the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same. In case of ECID Tx different from ECID Rx the loopback doesn't work.
– Generic Ethernet flows are dropped. (This includes the ETH2ETH flows).
2) Radio facing loopback: remote loopback allows an over-the-air loopback test to be performed when the modem is operating in a continuous mode. This is a line external loopback and connects the Receive data interface to the Transmit data interface. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. It is possible to enable this loopback only at aggregate level. When this loop is enabled the expected behavior is the following:
– TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are looped back with source and destination MAC address swapped. For TDM2ETH flows the loopback works only if the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same. In case of ECID Tx different from ECID Rx the loopback doesn't work.
– Generic Ethernet flows are dropped. (This includes the ETH2ETH flows).
2.8.6.8 Loopback activation
The loopback can be activated by each management system (local or remote). The activation command permits to define the duration of the loopback (time-out).
The time-out period starts at the activation time and expires at the end of the period spontaneously in the NE, a part for the case in which another reconfiguration of the time-out period is requested at the operator interface during the activation time. In this case, if the loopback point is still active because the activation time-out is not expired yet, the time-out period is reconfigurable and the specified time range starts again from the new updated activation date, overwriting the previous activation date and time-out values.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 77/308
2.8.6.9 Loopback life time
In order to avoid the risk of a permanent disconnection from MCT/NMS of a remote NE after the execution of a loopback, a time-out mechanism is supported.
The management system's operator has to provide the time range of the loopback time-out period expressed in hours/minutes starting from the time of the loopback activation.
A default time-out period may be suggested at the operator interface, even if it could be modified on user-needs basis.
After the NE reset, the activation of each loopback point is lost and must be recreated again if needed, starting with a new time-out period.
2.8.7 TMN communication channels
On 9500 MPR Network Element three types of TMN communication channels are present:
– 2 NMS interfaces through the use of VLANs 4085 and 4086 and 2 dedicated RJ45 ports.
– In-band TMN through the use of any USER port requiring the activation of a user defined VLAN
– TMN-RF allowing the management of a remote NE through radio.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 178/308
2.8.8 Traffic profiles
Three kinds of traffic profiles have been identified:
– TDM2TDM (9500 MPR ⇔ 9500 MPR, internal to an MPR network)
– TDM2Eth (9500 MPR ⇔ TDM to Ethernet)
– DATA (Ethernet to Ethernet)
The first two profiles meet MEF8 standard.
Terminal 1Terminal 2
Figure 29. Traffic profiles
Case 1
The E1 stream is inserted in Terminal 1 and extracted in Terminal 2. In this case the two IWFs used to packetize the traffic for the Ethernet switch in the MSS-1c are both internal to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2TDM in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type.
Case 2
The E1 stream is inserted in Terminal 1 and extracted in Terminal 2. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Radio type in Terminal 1 and Radio-Eth type in Terminal 2.
Case 3
The E1 stream is inserted/extracted in Terminal 1. One IWF is inside the 9500 MPR, but the second IWF is external to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is TDM2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. The Cross connections to be implemented are PDH-Eth type in Terminal 1.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 79/308
Figure 30. Traffic profiles
Case 4 and 5
In these cases Ethernet packets enter Terminal 1 and are extracted in Terminal 2. In case 4 the Ethernet packets encapsulate the E1 stream; in case 5 the packets are native Ethernet packets. None of the IWFs belongs to the 9500 MPR network. The Circuit Emulation Service is ETH2ETH in Terminal 1 and Terminal 2. No Cross connections must be implemented. The path is automatically implemented with the standard auto-learning algorithm of the 9500 MPR Ethernet switch.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 180/308
2.8.8.1 TDM2TDM
E1 traffic packetized only internally to 9500 MPR equipment.
Figure 31. E1 Traffic
Flow Id present (user defined)
Intermediate node configuration (E1 provisioning):
– node by node (building Cross-connection tables based on Flow Id)
Bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS → Highest Queue Priority association)
No flooding-autolearning necessary
Both the IWFs belong to 9500 MPR and the packets are not supposed to exit the 9500 MPR network.
The IWF parameters listed above, have predetermined values and don’t need to be provisioned.
– Mac addresses are determined as consequences of the cross connections.
– Payload size is fixed to 121 bytes
– ECID will be the same value as Flow Id (ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier)
– TDM clock source: clock recovery differential, node timing
– Flow Id provisioned by MCT/NMS
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 81/308
2.8.8.2 TDM2Eth
E1 traffic both internal and external to 9500 MPR equipment.
Figure 32. E1 Traffic
Flow Id present (user defined)
All the parameters must be configured compliant with the MEF8 standard
Adaptive or differential clock recovery supported
Bandwidth guaranteed (according to QoS → Highest Queue Priority association)
Destination MAC added before going into whole network (MEF8 compliant)
Only one of the IWFs belongs to 9500 MPR and the packets are supposed to exit the 9500 MPR network.
– MAC addresses: in all involved nodes are determined as consequences of the cross connections; the only exception is the Ethernet Terminal Node (the node where the TDM2ETH traffic goes through an user Ethernet port). In such ETN the source address is the node Mac address, the destination Mac address will be provisioned by MCT/NMS.
– Payload size: is fixed to 256 bytes
– ECID: provisioned by MCT/NMS, 2 different values may be used for each direction (ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier)
– TDM clock source is provisioned by MCT/NMS: clock recovery adaptive, clock recovery differential
– Flow Id is provisioned by MCT/NMS (One VLAN is assigned to each bi-directional circuit emulated E1 flow)
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 182/308
2.8.8.3 ETH2ETH
None of the IWFs belongs to 9500 MPR.
None of the parameters listed in the previous slide has to be configured (the 9500 MPR is transparent).
Figure 33. E1 Traffic
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 83/308
2.8.9 Ethernet Traffic Management
The Ethernet traffic is all the traffic entered the MPR network from user Ethernet ports.
By MCT/NMS it is possible to define the way to manage the Ethernet traffic according to one of the following options:
– 802.1D (MAC Address bridge)
– 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge).
2.8.9.1 Bridge type change
In case of change of the bridge type from 802.1Q to 802.1D, a new configuration file must be sent to the NE (or an old file can be used).
2.8.9.2 Reserved Multicast Addresses
The following table summarizes the actions taken for specific reserved multicast addresses. Frames identified with these destination addresses are handled uniquely since they are designed for Layer 2 Control Protocols.
The actions taken by the system can be:
– Discard - The system discards all ingress Ethernet frames and must not generate any egress Ether-net Frame carrying the reserved multicast address.
– Forward - The system accepts all ingress Ethernet frames as standard multicast frames and for-wards them accordingly.
– Peer - The system acts as a peer of the connected device in the operation of the relevant Layer 2 Control Protocol.
Reserved Multicast Address
Function Action
01-80-C2-00-00-00 Bridge Group Address Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-02 Clause 43 (Link Aggregation) and Clause 57 (OAM) of IEEE 802.3
Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-03 IEEE 802.1X PAE address Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-04 - 01-80-C2-00-00-0D
Reserved for future standardization Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-0E IEEE 802.1AB LLDP multicast address Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-0F Reserved for future standardization Discard
01-80-C2-00-00-10 All LANs Bridge Management Group Address Forward
01-80-C2-00-00-11 - 01-80-C2-00-00-1F
Reserved Forward
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 184/308
2.8.10 Quality Of Services (QoS)
The QoS function inside 9500 MPR is the result of a distributed implementation in the MSS-1c switch and MPT. Both those QoS functions are properly configured in order to get the wished behavior on Ethernet flows that will be transmitted.
2.8.10.1 QoS in the MSS-1c
The figure shows an overview of the QoS implementation inside the switch.
Figure 34. QoS in the MSS-1c
The Quality of Service feature of the Ethernet switch provides 4 internal queues per port to support different traffic priorities. Typically the high-priority traffic experiences less delay than that low-priority in the switch under congested conditions.
For each egress port according to method of QoS classification configured in the switch, the packets are assigned to each queue.
TDM flows classification
01-80-C2-00-00-20 GMRP Address (Clause 10 of IEEE 802.1D) Forward
01-80-C2-00-00-21 GVRP Address (IEEE 802.1Q) Forward
01-80-C2-00-00-22 - 01-80-C2-00-00-2F
Reserved for GARP Application Forward
01-80-C2-00-00-30 - 01-80-C2-00-00-3F
CCM and LTM Group Destination MAC Addresses (IEEE 802.1ag)
Forward
Reserved Multicast Address
Function Action
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 85/308
All the TDM traffic flows will be assigned to the highest egress priority queue (Q4).
Ethernet flows classification
For generic Ethernet flows in the switch the priority of each packet can be assigned according to the information in:
– IEEE 802.1p (the switch must be configured to 802.1Q): the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802.1P user-priority tag. If the tag is present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet
802.1P priority Queue
110, 111 Q3 (high priority)
100, 101 Q2
000, 001, 010, 011 Q1
– DiffServ (the switch must be configured to 802.1D): each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to determine the priority.
DiffServ priority Queue
111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 Q3 (high priority)
100110, 100100, 100010, 100000011110, 011100, 011010, 011000
Q2
All remaining values Q1
Scheduler
The scheduler algorithm cannot be configured. HQP scheduler algorithm is used on queue Q4. Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) is used on the other queues with the following weights:
QUEUE WEIGHT
Q3 (high priority) 4
Q2 2
Q1 1
QoS with jumbo frame
While there is no physical limitation to the number of ports that can receive jumbo frame, if to many jumbo flows are transmitted toward the same port into two different queues the QoS could work in wrong way. It is recommended to forward jumbo frame only in queue Q1 (lower priority).
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 186/308
2.8.10.2 QoS in the MPT
In the figure is shown an overview of the QoS implementation inside the MPT.
Figure 35. QoS in the MPT
The QoS feature provides eight internal queues to support different traffic priorities. The QoS function can assign the packet to one of the eight egress transmit queues.
– Queue 8 is assigned to TMN
– Queue 7 is assigned to TDM2TDM traffic
– Queue 6 is assigned to TDM2Eth traffic
Queues 1 to 5 are assigned to Ethernet traffic according to the information inside the packet as 802.1p field or DiffServ field.
QoS based on IEEE std. 802.1p
When 802.1p QoS mechanism is adopted, the reference is the standard “IEEE 802.1D-2004 Annex G User priorities and traffic classes” that defines 8 traffic types and the corresponding user priority values.
Considering that in the Radio Interface module for generic Ethernet traffic there are five egress queues the mapping 802.1p value to queue is the following:
802.1p priority Queue
111, 110 Q5 (high priority)
101 Q4
100 Q3
011, 000 Q2
010, 001 Q1
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 87/308
QoS based on DiffServ
DiffServ priority Queue
111000, 110000, 101110, 101000 Q5 (high priority)
100110, 100100, 100010, 100000 Q4
011110, 011100, 011010, 011000 Q3
010110, 010100, 010010, 010000001010, 001100, 001010, 001000, 000000
Q2
All remaining values Q1
Scheduler
HQP scheduler algorithm will be used on Q8, Q7 and Q6.
Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) algorithm will be used for the other five queues.
By default, the DWRR algorithm is used with the following weights:
Queue Weight
Q5 (higher priority) 16
Q4 8
Q3 4
Q2 2
Q1 1
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 188/308
2.8.11 Cross-connections
Figure 36. Cross-connection
The cross-connections are realized with a Layer-2 Ethernet Switch inside the MSS-1c.
The decision made by the switch to forward the received packet is based on the destination MAC address.
2.8.11.1 E1 Cross-connection
Each E1 can be cross connected independently.
E1 can be cross connected to any of the following ports:
– Radio port (Figure 37)
– Ethernet port (Figure 38)
Each E1 must be associated to a unique signal flow ID.
Figure 37. E1 from/to Radio port
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 89/308
Figure 38. E1 from/to Ethernet port
Typical use of the E1 from/to Ethernet port is in case of two co-located MSS-Access to expand the number of PDH ports for the other radio direction.
N.B. To configure these cross-connections a connected MPT is needed.
2.8.11.2 Ethernet flows
All flows different from the TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH ones are managed as the standard Ethernet packets:
– if the 802.1Q is enabled the related management is performed looking the VLAN and then, according to the destination address, each packet is switched to the correct port: radio, user Ethernet or E1
– if the 802.1Q is not enabled only the destination address is considered to route the packets.
The bandwidth assigned globally to the radio interface to the Ethernet traffic is the consequence, with a given radio capacity, of the number of E1 cross-connected on the radio interface. Hence the available bandwidth for Ethernet flows will be the configured radio bandwidth decreased by the bandwidth used by each TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 190/308
2.8.12 Synchronization
2.8.12.1 Synchronization overview
TDM data flow is fragmented and the fragments are transmitted over a Packet Switched Network (PSN);
The received fragments need to be reassembled in the original TDM data flow at the “original bit rate”
Two main methods can be used to recover at the Rx site, the original bit rate:
– Differential clock recovery with or without the Node timing: recalculation of the original clock based on the time delta with respect to a reference clock that is available at both Tx and Rx site (Differential: used in case of clock distribution on the whole network. It’s more reliable than Adaptive; also used in TDM2TDM traffic (MPR to MPR)). This method can be selected for each E1 stream.
– Adaptive clock recovery with or without the Node timing: based on the average rate at which the packets (fragments) arrive at Rx site (Adaptive: simpler network, but performances depends on the PDV (Packet Delay Variation) in the Network. Always used when the reference clock isn’t distributed on the whole network). This method can be selected for each E1 stream for TDM2Eth only.
In meshed networks (rings) do not close the synchronisation configuration.
2.8.12.1.1 Differential clock recovery
End System1
IWF IWF
End System2
PSNPSN
A common reference clock is available at both Ends.
The IWF system, at Rx side, generates the output clock based on RTP TimeStamps which are sent together with each Fragments.
Note
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 91/308
2.8.12.1.2 Adaptive clock recovery
End System1
IWF IWF
End System2
PSNPSN
A common reference clock is NOT available at both Ends.
The IWF system, at Rx side, generates the output clock based on data arrival rate: TDM clock is slowly adjusted to maintain the average fill level of a jitter buffer at its midpoint.
2.8.12.1.3 Node Timing
The Node Timing is timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. When it is selected the regen-erated E1 at receiver side is synchronized to the network element clock (NEC). This method can be selected for each E1 stream.
At MSS-1c level, all the “Node Timed” TDM flows:
– will egress the MSS1c with the same clock (the MSS-1c NEC);
– MUST ingress the MSS1c being synchronised by the same clock.
As for any synchronisation clock transmission, the user shall particularly take care to avoid synchronisation loop and TDM traffic hits:
– or the MSS-1c is the master clock and the external equipment must recover its own clock from one of the “node timed” TDM flows and use this recovered clock to generate its TDM flows;
– or the external equipment is the master clock (i.e. it generates all its TDM flows by using its internal clock) and the MSS-1c MUST use one of the “node timed” ingressing TDM flows as clock source for its NEC;
– or both of the MSS1c and external equipment MUST be synchronised by the same clock if this clock comes from another equipment.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 192/308
2.8.12.2 Synchronization interface
Each Network Element must have a reference clock (NEC), which will be distributed to each circuit of the NE. Such clock is a 25 MHz generated in the MSS-1c in the Clock Reference Unit (CRU) function.
The NEC is locked to a Synchronization Source.
The sources can be:
[1] Internal Local Oscillator. It is the clock provided by the Local Oscillator inside the NE
[2] Any E1 available at input traffic interfaces (the specific E1 port has to be chosen)
[3] The Symbol Rate of the Rx signal of the Radio direction
[4] SynchE: Any Synchronous Ethernet clock source available at enabled User Ethernet traffic inter-faces (both electrical and optical) configured in synchronous operation mode (the specific User Ethernet port has to be chosen). From ITU-T G.8264 point of view, the MSS is a Synchronous Ether-net equipment equipped with a system clock (NEC) following the ITU-T G.8262 recommendation. A User Ethernet interface configured in synchronous operation mode can work only at 1 Giga. In the particular case of electrical User Ethernet interfaces, these interfaces perform link auto negotiation to determine the master and slave clocks for the link. The clock slave role must be configured as part of auto negotiation parameters in order to use the interface as Synchronous Ethernet clock source.
Some rules have to be followed while configuring the Primary and Secondary clock sources.
All the NECs have to be configured as Master or Slave.
Only one Master is allowed in the network.
– If Master,
• The Restoration Mode can be Revertive or Not Revertive. If the mode is Revertive, when a failed source becomes available, the switch goes back.
• The Primary sources must be choosen among 2) or 4).
– then Master Secondary Source must be selected among 1), 2) or 4).
– If Slave,
• The Restoration Mode is fixed to Revertive.
• The Primary Source must be choosen between 3) or 4)
• The Secondary Source can be choosen among 1), 2) or 4).
For each available sync source, the CRU detects the signal Degrade Alarm on each available sync source. Such Signal Degrade alarm raises also in case of muted (missing) clock.
The Signal Degraded Alarm relevant to the selected Synchronization Source, or the relevant circuit Fail, causes the switching of the Synchronization Source.
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 93/308
User Manual
Product information and planning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 194/308
3 NE Management by software application
3.1 WebEML start
This chapter explains all the screens of the WebEML, which is started by a double click on the WebEML icon of the PC desktop.
The PC must be connected to the CT port of he MSS-1c.
Refer to paragraph 4.3 - “Software local copy” to get all the information to copy the WebEML from the soft-ware package CD ROM and to connect the PC to the MSS-1c.
1) To start the WebEML double click on the relevant icon on the PC desktop.
2) NETO opens. Insert the IP address of the NE (default: 192.168.30.1) and click OK.
N.B. To access the NE the PC must be configured to “Get automatically an IP address”, because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.252. The PC Ethernet port must be connected to the CT connector of the MSS-1c.
N.B. 192.168.30.1 is the IP address of the port from MSS-1c and cannot be modified. The management can be done also by the NMS port, but the PC must be configured with fixed IP and gateway. First open the WebEML and after connect the cable.
Warning: Without the MPT connected to the MSS-1c, it is not possible to open the WebEML on the CT port from MSS-1c.
Warning: If all the WebEML images/icons are missing, check that file msimg32.dll is present in System32.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 95/308
3) When the NE is supervised, click Show.
4) The Main view opens.
Figure 39. shows the Main View of an MPT-MC.
The same screen (and same menus) will appear with a connection to an MPT-HC. The only difference is the naming.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 196/308
Tool bar
AlarmSynthesis
Navigator
Generalinformation
Domain Alarm Synthesis Tab-panels
IP address of the connected NE
Connection status
Figure 39. Main view: System Overview
3.2 Tool bar
The Tool bar has 3 buttons:
– Exit: to quit the application
– Connect to NE: to establish the connection to the NE
– Disconnect: to disconnect the NE
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 97/308
3.3 Alarm Synthesis
The WebEML provides an alarm functionality that informs the operator on the severity of the different alarms in the NE as well as on the number of current alarms. There are five different alarm severity levels. In the WebEML these different levels are associated with colors.
– Red: Critical alarm (CRI)
– Orange: Major alarm (MAJ)
– Yellow: Minor alarm (MIN)
– Cyan: Warning alarm (WAR)
– Blue: Indeterminate (IND)
The meaning of the icons in the Alarm Synthesis is:
[1] CRI - Critical alarmSynthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).
[2] MAJ - Major (Urgent) alarmSynthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting.
[3] MIN - Minor (Not Urgent) alarmSynthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can be decided.
[4] WAR - Warning alarmSynthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network.
[5] IND - Indeterminate alarmSynthesis of alarms not associated with the previous severities. Not operative.
Each alarm severity is represented by an alarm icon situated in the top left hand corner of the view. These alarm icons are constantly represented on the different Equipment views so that the operator is always aware of the alarms occurring in the system.
Furthermore the number in the alarm icon gives the number of active alarms with that specific severity.
3.4 Domain Alarm Synthesis Area
This area contains the icons representing the alarms per domain. Each icon indicates the number of alarm occurrences for each domain.
The meaning of the icons in the Domain alarm synthesis area is:
[1] COM – Communication alarmSynthesis of alarms of the Communication domain.
[2] EQP – Equipment alarmSynthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 198/308
3.5 General Information on the Management State
The different management states concerning the NE are shown in two tab-panels:
– Radio Synthesis
– Network Supervision
The Radio Synthesis gives information on the:
– Abnormal Condition state: indicates whether some abnormal conditions have been recognized.
The Network Supervision gives information on the:
– Local Access state: indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft terminal or by the OS
– OS Supervision state: indicates whether or not the communication with the OS is established.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 99/308
3.6 Navigator area
The Navigator menu depends on the selected function in the upper tab-panels.
Four tab-panels are available:
[1] Commissioning (par. 3.6.1 on page 101)
• Inventory
• Software Download
• Configuration (par. 3.6.1.3 on page 105)
– Date/Time– Site Information– Protection– Radio– Advanced Radio– MSS-1c– Networking
• Backup / Restore
• Monitoring
[2] Performance Monitoring (par. 3.6.2 on page 117)
• Performance History File Upload
• Normalized
• Adaptive Modulation
• Ethernet
• Monitoring
[3] Troubleshooting (par. 3.6.3 on page 126)
• Inventory
• Troubleshooting
• Monitoring
[4] Maintenance (par. 3.6.4 on page 128)
• Inventory
• Software Download
• Configuration > Radio
• Backup / Restore
• Monitoring
The System Overview tab-panel (Figure 39) is the Welcome screen of the WebEML. It is a read-only screen, which shows all the configuration parameters of the MPT.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1100/308
3.6.1 Commissioning
This menu has four sub-menus:
– Inventory
– Software Download
– Configuration
– Backup / Restore
– Monitoring
3.6.1.1 Inventory
This menu provides all the inventory data of the NE.
Figure 40. Inventory
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 101/308
3.6.1.2 Software Download
This menu must be used to download a new software version on the NE (Software Package Versionstab-panel) or to get a summary of the specific software versions on the programmable different compo-nents on the Active bank (Active Software Package Summary tab-panel) or on the Stand-by bank (Stand-by Software Package Summary tab-panel).
3.6.1.2.1 Software Package Versions tab-panel
Figure 41. Software Download: Software Package versions
Warning: On the PC containing the Software Package must be installed an FTP Server.The PC's firewall (i.e Microsoft's default firewall) may prevent the download from starting up.
To download a new software version fill the FTP Server Parameters field (as shown in Figure 42):
– Server Address: enter the IP address of the Server
– Username: enter the username assigned to the FTP Server
– Password: enter the password assigned to the FTP Server
– Port: 21
then click on the Check button.
– Select in the Software Package field the file descriptor (previously copied on the PC). The path where to find it, after the SWP local copy, is //ECT/SWDW/R95MSS1C/1_0_0/R951C.DSC
– Put a check mark on the Forced check box to download the complete file without any comparison between the file already present in the stand-by bank and the new file to be downloaded.
– Press the Start Download button.
– At the end press the Activate button of the Stand-by Software Package.
– The NE reboots and the supervision is lost.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1102/308
Warning: After the activation of the Standby bank, the connection between the WebEML and the NE is lost. The WebEML must be re-launched.
Figure 42. Software download
3.6.1.2.2 Active Software Package Summary tab-panel
This tab-panel shows the version of the Software Package of the active bank.
Figure 43. Software Download: Active Software Package summary
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 103/308
3.6.1.2.3 Stand-by Software Package Summary tab-panel
This tab-panel shows the Software Package version of the stand-by bank.
Figure 44. Software Download: Stand-by Software Package summary
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1104/308
3.6.1.3 Configuration
3.6.1.3.1 Date/Time
The NE Date/Time screen displays the current NE time and the current computer time.
To re-align the NE time to the computer time, click on the Synchronize NE with Computer button and click on the Refresh button.
If an SNTP Server has to be used to distribute the time, the SNTP protocol must be enabled by a check mark in the SNTP Enabled box and the IP address of the Server must be inserted in the relevant field. The IP address of the Spare Server, if available, must be inserted in the relevant field.
Figure 45. Date/Time Configuration
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 105/308
3.6.1.3.2 Site Information
This menu has to be used to insert the optional information to identify the site (Site Name and Site Loca-tion).
Figure 46. Site Information
3.6.1.3.3 Protection
Select the 1+0 protection scheme and Apply.
Figure 47. Protection Configuration
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1106/308
3.6.1.3.4 Radio
1) Telecommunication standard
Select the ETSI market.
2) Modulation
The operation mode can be with Fixed Modulation (FCM) or with the Adaptive Modulation (ACM).
a) Operation with the Fixed Modulation (FCM) (Figure 48 and Figure 49)
• Select in the Coding Modulation Type field “Fixed (FCM)”.
• Select in the Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing to be used (up to 56 MHz for MPT-HC and up to 28 MHz for MPT-MC).
• Select the Modem Profile Option: Current Mask Standard Profile or New Mask Standard Profile
• Select in the Reference Modulation field the suitable Modulation scheme (up to 256 QAM for MPT-HC and up to 128 QAM for MPT-MC).
• According to the selected Channel Spacing and to the Modulation the relevant capacity in the Capacity field will appear.
b) Operation with the Adaptive Modulation (ACM) (Figure 50)
The main idea behind Adaptive Modulation in Point to Point system is to adjust adaptively the modulation as well as a range of other system parameters based on the near-instan-taneous channel quality information perceived by the receiver, which is feed back to the transmitter with the aid of a feedback channel.
The switching between the modulation schemes is hitless and maintains the same RF channel bandwidth.
To configure the Adaptive Modulation:
• Select in the Coding Modulation Type field “Adaptive (ACM)”.• Select in the Channel Spacing field the suitable channel spacing. • Select in the Modem Profile Option field the spectral efficiency class to be set as
reference: Current Mask Standard Profile or New Mask Standard Profile. • Select in the Reference Modulation field the reference modulation, which corre-
sponds to the lowest modulation scheme.• Choose in the Allowed Modulation field all the modulation schemes to be used with
the Adaptive Modulation. The modulation schemes (from the lowest to the highest scheme) must be contiguous.
3) Frequency
The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the chan-nel arrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter or several predefined shifters.
In the Shifter field select the suitable shifter.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 107/308
In the Tx frequency field insert the suitable Tx frequency (the Rx frequency is automatically calculated by using the inserted Tx frequency and the shifter).
In the Rx frequency field will appear the calculated Rx frequency, but, by putting a check mark in the Allow Rx Frequency Tuning check box this frequency can be changed in +5 MHz range to implement the “Exotic” shifter configuration, if required.
4) Tx Mute
To mute the transmitter put a check mark in the Mute check box.
5) Transmit Power Control Mode
Select the Mode: RTPC or ATPC.
6) RTPC settings
– Tx power without Adaptive Modulation
If the ATPC is disabled the Tx Power field is available. For the Tx Power range refer to the indication in the screen.
In this field write the new value within the allowed transmitted power range.
– Tx Power with Adaptive Modulation
The operator can modify only the Tx power relevant to the lowest modulation scheme. In this field the operator has to enter the constant power, which will be used with the lowest modulation.
The same power value will be used by the other modulation schemes.
7) ATPC settings
The ATPC cannot be set with ACM (only with FCM).
– ATPC Remote RSL Threshold
The value of the low power threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field. When the Rx power is equal to this power the ATPC algorithm starts to operate.
– Min ATPC Tx power and Max ATPC Tx power
The Min Tx power and Max Tx power, regarding the Tx Range in the ATPC management, can be written in the relevant field.
Note
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1108/308
Figure 48. Radio Configuration: FCM - RTPC
Figure 49. Radio Configuration: FCM - ATPC
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 109/308
Figure 50. Radio Configuration: ACM - RTPC
3.6.1.3.5 Advanced Radio
Figure 51. Advanced Radio Configuration
This menu allows the operator to define the expected and sent identifier values of parameters related to the link management and, if necessary, modify them.
If the link identifier is Enabled the following fields can be written:
– Tx Radio Link Identifier: this field is the link identifier inserted on the transmitting NE (1 to 255)
– Expected Rx Radio Link Identifier: this field is the link identifier expected at the receiving NE (0 to 255)
N.B. If the Expected Rx Link Indentifier is "0", there is no link identifier mismatch management.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1110/308
3.6.1.3.6 MSS-1c
This menu allows:
[1] to configure the MSS-1c by using the Provisioning Tool;
[2] to download and execute a previously created configuration file (by using the provisioning tool) or to save on the PC the configuration of the MSS-1c.
Warning:On the PC containing the configuration file must be installed an FTP Server.
Figure 52. MSS-1c Configuration
[1] To configure the MSS-1c press button Start Tool. The Provisioning Tool opens (refer to chapter 3.6.6for the configuration procedures).
[2] To access the NE fill the FTP Server Parameters field (as shown in Figure 53):
• Server Address: enter the IP address of the Server
• Username: enter the username assigned to the FTP Server
• Password: enter the password assigned to the FTP Server
• Port: 21
then click on the Check button.
To download (from the PC to the NE) a configuration file:
1) click on Browse
2) select the configuration file to be downloaded
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 111/308
N.B. If the configuration file (created by using the MPT Provisioning Tool - refer to par. 3.6.6) has been created by using the Initial Configuration option or the Reconfigurationoption, after the download the NE will reboot. If the configuration file has been created by using the Change Configuration option, after the download the NE will not reboot.
3) click on Download and Execute
To upload (from the NE to the PC) the configuration of the NE:
1) click on Browse
2) assign a name to the configuration file to be saved
3) click on Upload
Figure 53. FTP Server Parameters
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1112/308
3.6.1.3.7 Networking
This menu must be used to assign (or to show) the networking configuration of the NE.
This menu has three sub-menus:
– Network Interfaces
– Static Routing
– Trusted SNMP Managers
3.6.1.3.7.1 Network Interfaces
– NE IP Parameters field
This IP address is the local IP address of the NE.
– TMN RF Access field
Put a check box in this field to get access to the NE in the remote radio station.
– NMS1/NMS2 IP Parameters fields
Assign the IP parameters to the 10/100Base-T 2 Ethernet ports (if required) for NMS application.
Note: In case of change of NMS1 (or 2) IP adress previously used for NMS2 (or 1), proceed in 2 steps: disable NMS2 (or1) and apply the configuration then change NMS1 (or 2) and apply the con-figuration.
– TMN In-band IP Parameters
Enter the IP Address with the relevant submask for the TMN In-band management.The VLAN ID can be changed only with the Provisioning Tool (value between 2 and 4080).
Warning: If the TMN In-band is not enabled in the Provisioning Tool, it is not possible the enable the TMN In-band by the WebEML.
Figure 54. Network Interfaces
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 113/308
3.6.1.3.7.2 Static Routing
The Static Routing menu allows to configure the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.
– Route Type: possible selection is Network, Host, Default.
– Destination to address to a range of IP addresses with relevant subnet mask.
– Next Hop: the User can select Point to Point Link (to address the link on the radio side) or Gateway IP to define the address of a gateway reachable on one interface.
Figure 55. Static Routing
The Add button inserts above a new Static Routing Table row.
The Add Last inserts below a new Static Routing Table row.
The Delete button deletes the selected Static Routing Table row.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1114/308
3.6.1.3.7.3 Trusted SNMP Managers
A Trusted manager is an SNMP manager to which the NE automatically sends the TRAPS generated inside the NE.
Figure 56. Trusted SNMP Managers
To activate a Trusted Manager insert the IP Address of the SNMP manager, the UDP port and the Man-ager Type (Network Manager Layer or Equipment Manager Layer), then click on Register.
In Figure 57. one Manager has been created.
Figure 57. Manager registration
To delete a Manager select the Manager from the list and press Unregister.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 115/308
3.6.1.4 Backup / Restore
This menu allows to make a backup (save the NE configuration to the PC) and to make a restore (down-load a configuration, from a previously done backup, to the NE). The backup and restore is done through FTP.
Figure 58. Backup / Restore
Fill the FTP Server Parameters field.
Click Browse to select the directory and the name of the file.
Press Backup or Restore according to the operation to be done.
3.6.1.5 Monitoring
For this menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1116/308
3.6.2 Performance Monitoring
This menu has five sub-menus:
– Performance History File Upload
– Normalized
– Adaptive Modulation
– Ethernet
– Monitoring
3.6.2.1 Performance History File Upload
This menu allows to export in a .csv file the data regarding the performance counters. This operation is done through an FTP session.
– Fill the FTP Server Parameters area with the FTP Server parameters.
– Select in the Performance Family field the type of counters to be exported: Normalized Perfor-mance Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.2) / Adaptive Modulation Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.3) / MPT QoS Ingress Counters (refer to par. 3.6.2.4.1).
Note: The counters to be exported must be stopped (refer to the relevant paragraphs).
– Select the History Period in second (default: 5s) and click Apply.
– Click on Browse to choose the destination directory and to assign the name of the file.
– Click on Upload History to export the file.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 117/308
Figure 59. Performance History File Upload
3.6.2.2 Normalized
3.6.2.2.1 Counter Thresholds
In the Counter Threshold screen the Low Threshold and High Threshold can be changed for each G.826 parameter (BBE, ES, SES). The high threshold will cause the activation of the alarm "Threshold exceeded" during the Performance Monitoring period and the low threshold will cause the deactivation of the same alarm.
N.B. For the 24 hour report only the High Threshold can be changed.
Press Apply to send to the equipment the new parameters.
Press Default to restore the default parameters.
Figure 60. Counter Thresholds
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1118/308
3.6.2.2.2 15Min Counter
The upper part of the screen will show the values of the current 15 min period, the lower part will show the last elapsed 15 min period.
Press the Activate button (1) to activate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation.
Press the Start icon (2) to start the monitoring of the current 15 min period and set the refresh period (if the NE counter computation is activated).
Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation (if the NE counter computation is activated)
Figure 61. 15Min Counter activation
Figure 62. 15Min Counter
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 119/308
When a 15 minute period is over, the period Data is automatically reported and shown on the lower part of the screen.
Figure 63. 15Min Counter history
Press the Stop icon (1) to stop the current 15 min counter monitoring.Press the Deactivate button (2) to deactivate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation (if the counter monitoring is stopped).
Figure 64. 15Min Counter deactivation
3.6.2.2.3 24H Counter
The 24H Counter is identical to the 15Min Counter, but the period is 24 hours and not 15 minutes.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1120/308
3.6.2.3 Adaptive Modulation
The Adaptive Modulation Counter screen will show the total seconds during which each modulation scheme has been used.
3.6.2.3.1 15Min Counter
The upper part of the screen will show the values of the current 15 min period, the lower part will show the last elapsed 15 min period.
Press the Activate button (1) to activate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation.
Press the Start icon (2) to start the monitoring of the current 15 min period and set the refresh period (if the NE counter computation is activated).
Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation (if the NE counter computation is activated).
Figure 65. Adaptive Modulation counter activation
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 121/308
Figure 66. 15Min Counter
When a 15 minute period is over, the period Data is automatically reported and shown on the lower part of the screen.
Figure 67. 15Min Counter history
Press the Stop icon (1) to stop the current 15 min counter monitoring.
Press the Deactivate button (2) to deactivate the 15 min normalized NE counter computation (if the counter monitoring is stopped).
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1122/308
Figure 68. 15Min Counter deactivation
3.6.2.3.2 24H Counter
The 24H Counter is identical to the 15Min Counter, but the period is 24 hours and not 15 minutes.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 123/308
3.6.2.4 Ethernet
3.6.2.4.1 MPT QoS Ingress Counters
MPT QoS Ingress counters computation is always activated.
The upper part of the screen will show a graphical evolution of the counters.
The lower part will show a table reporting the counter values when the monitoring is activated. Each time the counters are refreshed, an entry will be added in the table.
Press the Start icon to start the monitoring of the MPT QoS Ingress counters and set the refresh period (default : 5s ).
Press the Stop icon to stop the MPT QoS Ingress counters monitoring.
Press the Reset button to reset the NE counter computation
Figure 69. Ethernet: Qos Counters
The QoS counters are:
– Transmitted Frames
– Discarded Frames
– Transmitted Bytes
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1124/308
The counters are shown in the following formats:
– bar
– graphical
– tabular
and can be displayed for a single queue (Queue # tab-panel) or for all the queues (Aggregate tab-panel).
The default span of the graphical format is 24 hours, but is can be changed.
An example of the QoS Counters screen is given in Figure 70.
Figure 70. Qos Counters example for Aggregate
3.6.2.5 Monitoring
For the Alarms sub-menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.1.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 125/308
3.6.3 Troubleshooting
This menu has three sub-menus:
– Inventory
– Troubleshooting
– Monitoring
3.6.3.1 Inventory
This menu provides all the inventory data of the NE.
Figure 71. Inventory
3.6.3.2 Troubleshooting
This menu allows:
[1] to activate the available loopbacks on the MPT;
[2] to manually manage the ACM;
[3] to restart the MPT.
[1] Two loopbacks are available:
• Line Side (the signal is send back to the Indoor equipment)
• Radio Side (the signal is send back to the remote station)
To activate a loopback select the loopback and press Activate.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1126/308
A timout can be associated to the loopback. Enter the suitable timeout (max: 4 days) and click on Apply.
Figure 72. Loopback activation
To deactivate a loopback press Deactivate.
[2] To lock the ACM engine put a check mark in the Lock ACM engine box and select the modulation scheme to be used.
Figure 73. ACM Manual Management
[3] To restart the MPT press the Restart NE button.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 127/308
3.6.3.3 Monitoring
For this menu refer to paragraph 3.6.5.
3.6.4 Maintenance
The Maintenance menu has 5 sub-menus:
– Inventory (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.1)
– Backup / Restore (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.4)
– Software Download (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.2)
– Configuration > Radio (refer to paragraph 3.6.1.3.4)
– Monitoring (refer to paragraph 3.6.5)
Figure 74. Maintenance
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1128/308
3.6.5 Monitoring
This menu has four sub-menus:
– Alarms
– Power measurements
– Modem measurements
– Events (only in the Troubleshooting menu)
3.6.5.1 Alarms
The Alarms menu allows to display and store the alarms of the NE.
Two global lists of alarms are displayed:
– CURRENT ALARMS shows all the equipment alarms currently present,
– ALARM LOG shows all the equipment alarms currently present and the history of the alarms (i.e. cleared alarms).
When an alarm is no longer active it disappears from the Current Alarm list and it is displayed in the Alarm log list as a cleared alarm
The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state.
– Red: CRITICAL alarm
– Orange: MAJOR alarm
– Yellow: MINOR alarm
– Cyan: WARNING alarm
– Blue: INDETERMINATE alarm (Note that the equipment has no alarm having such severity)
– Green: CLEARED alarm (alarm no longer active).
Within the tab-panel, each alarm is provided with the information below.
– Time Stamp: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
– Probable Cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm.
– Type: alarm class (COMMUNICATION – alarm not created inside the equipment, but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/propagation problems; EQUIPMENT: inside alarm of the equipment).
– Object: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.
– Severity: alarm severity.
– Additional Text: this is an additional text regarding the alarm.
Note
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 129/308
Figure 75. Alarms
3.6.5.2 Power measurements
To start the measurements click on Start icon.
Start
Figure 76. Power measurements
Select the Refresh Period (default = 5 sec)
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1130/308
Stop
Figure 77. Power measurements
The screen is divided in two parts, relevant to the two radio hop directions:
– Near End To Far End Power Monitoring (upper part)
– Far End To Near End Power Monitoring (lower part)
The bar indications and the curves, regarding the Tx Power and the Rx signal (RSL), are shown for each direction. The Span of the curve can be changed.
Available buttons from the left to the right side:
– Zoom Out
– Zoom In
– Scroll Lock
– Left and right arrows (4 buttons) to navigate in the curve
– Erase to erase the curves
– Export to create an Excel file to store the Power measurements.
To stop the measurements press the Stop icon on the upper right corner.
N.B. In the power graph the time starts from 0, to know the real time corresponding to 0, open the csv file to get the real time.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 131/308
3.6.5.3 Modem measurements
To start the measurements click on Start icon.
Start
Figure 78. Modem measurements
Select the Refresh Period (default = 5 sec)
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1132/308
Stop
Figure 79. Modem measurements
The screen is divided in two parts, relevant to the two radio hop directions:
– Near End To Far End Modem Monitoring (upper part)
– Far End To Near End Modem Monitoring (lower part)
The bar indications and the curves, regarding the MSE and the used Modulation scheme, are shown for each direction. By putting the mouse on the curve more information is available, as shown in the Figure. The Span of the curve can be changed.
Available buttons from the left to the right side:
– Zoom Out
– Zoom In
– Scroll Lock
– Left and right arrows (4 buttons) to navigate in the curve
– Erase to erase the curves
– Export to create an Excel file to store the Power measurements.
To stop the measurements press the Stop icon on the upper right corner.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 133/308
3.6.5.4 Events
The Events menu allows to display all the messages exchanged between the WebEML and the NE.
An event is meant to be:
– a configuration change
– a change of the value of an attribute
– a manual operation carried out by the operator.
The following information is provided for each event:
– Date: date and time of occurrence of the event. The format is week day/month/day hh:mm:ss. Ref-erence Time (CEST) year.
– Source: the source of the event.
– Details: a statement built with the event log data to explain what the event represents.
Figure 80. Events
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1134/308
3.6.6 Provisioning Tool
This tool allows to configure the MSS-1c. It is launched by the Start Tool button on the MSS-1c menu of the WebEML.
The Welcome screen asks to select one of the 3 configuration modes:
– Initial Configuration: to start from an empty configuration
– Reconfiguration: to load an existing configuration file and then modify everything
– Change Configuration: to load an existing configuration file and modify only some items. This is useful to modify a running configuration without impacting already configured services (cross conec-tions and VLANs). When this file will be downloaded to the NE by using the WebEML (menu Con-figuration > MSS-1c) the NE will not reboot after the download.
Figure 81. Provisioning Tool: Welcome screen
To configure the NE enter step by step all the menus as explained in para 3.6.6.1 to para 3.6.6.7.
Note 1: When the provisioning file will be loaded into the NE in order to set up the Configuration, the behaviour of the NE will depend on the way the configuration has been realized.
Note 2: If you have selected Initial configuration or Reconfiguration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will reset and at start-up will send the new configuration.
Note 3: If you have selected Change Configuration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will send directly the configuration to the NE. In this case the configuration can be modified, that is removing or creating some cross connections or VLANs or enabling or disabling user ports without impacting the traffic on unmodified circuits.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 135/308
3.6.6.1 Ethernet port provisioning
Figure 82. Ethernet ports provisioning
3.6.6.1.1 MPT Connection
MPT connected through: select the right port where the MPT is connected to MSS-1c. This information is used to configure the radio ports used in cross connections (TDM and VLANs).
3.6.6.1.2 User 1- electrical port
To configure an Electrical user port like user 1:
– Port Enabled: check the box
– Auto negotiation:
• check the box: the port will negotiate speed and duplex mode with its peer
• do not check the box: speed and duplex mode are selected by the operator (forced mode)
– If Auto negotiation is selected, for Speed select one or several check boxes, the same for duplex mode
– If Auto negotiation is not selected, for Speed select only one value, the same for duplex mode.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1136/308
3.6.6.1.3 User 2- electrical - syncE port
To configure a SyncE electrical port like user 2, proceed the same way as for user 1. In addition configure the Network synchronization.
– Auto, if you do not use the syncE property of the port
– SyncE IN, if you use the port as synchronization input. MSS-1c receives clock from external equip-ment.
– SyncE OUT, if you use the port as a synchronization output. MSS-1c sends its clock to external equipment.
Note this feature is authorized only if the port is set in Auto negotiation mode with speed 1000 Mbit/s and full duplex only.
3.6.6.1.4 User 3 & 4-electrical / optical port
Thanks to SFP connected into the relevant slots, these two ports can be configured in electrical or optical mode.
Once the Port Enable Check box is selected, you can choose the type of SFP in the SFP list (Disable or Electrical or Optical)
In the Electrical mode, the configuration is like user 1.
In the Optical mode, the Port configuration can be set to Auto negotiation or not (forced mode). The speed is always 1000 Mbit/s.
The duplex mode is always Full Duplex.
Note: User port 2 can be used as SynchE port.
3.6.6.2 PDH ports and local IWF cross connection provisioning
For the explanation of the traffic profiles TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH refer to par. 2.8.8 on page 79.
Note: The 75 ohm unbalanced impedance with BNC or 1.6/5.6 connectors. The 120 ohm balanced impedance with other connectors.
3.6.6.2.1 TDM2TDM Cross connection
To configure a TDM2TDM cross connection:
– Configure the E1 port Impedance (75 or 120 ohm)
– Choose the E1 port you want to configure (between 1 and 10)
– In column Enabled: Check the box
– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). Note that VLAN Id is unique.
– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM in the list (default value)
– In column Node Timing: Check the box or not. When it is selected, the regenerated E1 at receiver side are synchronized to the network element clock (NEC)
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 137/308
– In column XCo to port: Select Radio Port (default value). The cross connection is established between an E1 port and the Radio
Port E1-1 and E1-2 are being configured in the figure which follows.
Figure 83. Cross connection TDM2TDM
The “One shot tributaries configuration” is also available to configure all the tributaries in one shot as shown in Figure 84.
N.B. In case of the "One shot tributary configuration" is not fully displayed, check that you have selected "classic window" setting, if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7.
N.B. In Reconfiguration mode, if the user creates a new TDM XCO on a new TDM port with a VLAN Id used previously for another TDM port which is now disabled, this new TDM XCO will not work (example: E1-1 is configured with VLAN Id 10. Reconfigure the MSS-1c with E1-1 disabled and E1-2 enabled with VLAN Id 10).Two workarounds may be used:
1) re-enable the disabled TDM port and configure it with an unused VLAN Id (in our example: enable E1-1 with VLAN Id 9);
2) switch off then on the MSS-1c.
Figure 84. One shot tributaries configuration
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1138/308
The following picture shows the different elements involved in the cross connection, in green the PDH part and CES part (encapsulation in Ethernet frame done by IWF), in blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.
Figure 85. Cross connection functional scheme
3.6.6.2.2 TDM2ETH Cross connection
To configure a TDM2ETH cross connection:
– Configure the E1 port Impedance (75 or 120 Ohms). This choice is for all the ports.
– Choose the E1 port you want to configure (between 1 and 10)
– In column Enabled: Check the box
– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). Note that VLAN Id is unique.
– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2ETH in the list
– In columns ECID TX and ECID RX: Enter an ECID RX and ECID TX which are identifiers of the E1 flow
– In column TDM Clock Sync: Select Differential or Adaptive in the list
– In column Node Timing: Check the box or not. When it is selected, the regenerated E1 at receiver side are synchronized to the network element clock (NEC)
– In column XCo to port: Select Radio Port (default value). The cross connection is established between an E1 port and the Radio port.
See E1-2 in the previous screenshot of Figure 83.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 139/308
3.6.6.2.3 Cross connection to user Ethernet port
Figure 86. Cross connection to user Ethernet port
N.B. In case of the "One shot tributary configuration" is not fully displayed, check that you have selected "classic window" setting, if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7.
N.B. In Reconfiguration mode, if the user creates a new TDM XCO on a new TDM port with a VLAN Id used previously for another TDM port which is now disabled, this new TDM XCO will not work (example: E1-1 is configured with VLAN Id 10. Reconfigure the MSS-1c with E1-1 disabled and E1-2 enabled with VLAN Id 10).Two workarounds may be used:
1) re-enable the disabled TDM port and configure it with an unused VLAN Id (in our example: enable E1-1 with VLAN Id 9);
2) switch off then on the MSS-1c.
To configure a cross connection between an E1 port and a user port:
– First, enter the parameters as explained in the previous paragraphs, then
– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth. If TDM2TDM has been selected the Ethernet user port must be connected to an Ethernet user port of another MSS-c.
– In column XCO to Port: Select a user port (user 1 to user 4) in the list
– In column MAC Addr: Enter the External IWF MAC address which is used as Destination Address in Ethernet frames built to carry TDM information in MPR network
The following picture represents the different elements involved in the cross connection, in green the PDH part and CES part (encapsulation in Ethernet frame done by IWF), in blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1140/308
Figure 87. Cross connection functional scheme
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 141/308
3.6.6.3 Management port provisioning
Figure 88. Management port provisioning
3.6.6.3.1 NMS1 & NMS2
To configure the NMS1 and NMS2 ports, in the relevant area:
– Port Enabled: check the box
– Auto negotiation:
• check the box: the port will negotiate speed and duplex mode with its peer
• do not check the box: speed and duplex mode are selected by the operator (forced mode)
– If Auto negotiation is selected, for Speed select one or several check boxes, the same for duplex mode
– If Auto negotiation is not selected, for Speed select only one value, the same for duplex mode
3.6.6.3.2 In-band TMN on one user Ethernet port configuration
To configure the TMN In-band:
– Enabled: Check the box
– Port number: Select one port in the list. For 802.1D mode, whatever the port selected, the VLAN will be broadcasted on all the 4 ports.
– TMN VLAN Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id in the range 2 to 4080.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1142/308
3.6.6.3.3 NE Public MAC Address
NE public MAC address: used as Source Address in Ethernet frames built to carry TDM information in MPR network. This is a read only field. The NE public MAC address is a parameter of the application. It is given at launch time.
3.6.6.4 Create a TDM cross connection between Radio and Ethernet port
Figure 89. TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port
Max. number of cross-connections: 239.
To configure a TDM cross connection between radio and Ethernet port:
– Push button Add cross-connection and fill the fields.
– In column User port: Select a port in the list
– In column Flow Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (between 2 and 4080). This VLAN Id must be equal to the one used to encapsulate PDH flows at the transmitter side
– In column Service Profile: Select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH, also equal to what is configured at trans-mitter side
– In column TDM Clock Sync: Select Differential or Adaptive in the list. The clock sync is also equal to what is configured at transmitter side: Differential or Adaptive
– In column Outgoing MAC destination: enter the MAC address of the destination equipment.
– Note that Outgoing MAC Source address, which is equal to the NE MAC address, is displayed for information and will be used with the previous one to generate the cross connection inside the switch.
The following picture represents the elements involved in the cross connection, here only the switch. In blue the Ethernet part realized by the switch.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 143/308
Figure 90. Cross connection functional scheme
3.6.6.5 Network Synchronization Clock provisioning
Figure 91. Network Synchronization Clock provisioning
N.B. Only the ports (ETH and PDH) previously defined are available to support the synchronization.
To configure the network synchronization:
– Synchronization role, select in the list:
• Master means the NE will send the clock through radio link to another NE
• Slave means the NE receives the clock from the radio link or another source
– Restoration criteria, select a criteria in the list. This is used to configure the behavior of the syn-chronization system when it has switched to secondary source and when the primary source becomes available:
• Revertive means the NEC comes back to the primary source
• Not revertive means the NEC stays locked to the secondary source and will return to the primary source only when the secondary one will fail
– Primary source, select one of the proposed source
– Secondary source, select one of the proposed source
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1144/308
For more details on the Synchronization refer to par. 2.8.12.2 on page 93.
The following picture shows an example of network where the left NE is the master clock NE. It takes its synchronization clock from an external source.
Other NEs are slaves NE which are synchronized through the radio link.
Note that in the Slave mode the primary source can be a SyncE port.
3.6.6.6 Bridge provisioning (Create a user virtual LAN)
In the NE bridge mode field select in the list:
– 802.1D: default switch configuration, MAC learning based switching
– 802.1Q: switch mode with Virtual LAN, gives access to the table below. Switching is based on MAC and VLAN Id
Figure 92. NE bridge mode selection
To create a user virtual LAN:
– Push button Add VLAN and fill the fields.
– In column VLAN Id: Enter a valid VLAN Id (from 2 to 4080) and not used in another VLAN or cross connection
– In column VLAN Name: Enter a name
– In columns User 1 to 4: Check the box if the port is implied in the VLAN. Both enabled and disabled ports can be member of a VLAN. Note that radio port is automatically included.
– In columns Untagged User 1 to 4: Check the box if you want the port removes VLAN tag at egress.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 145/308
To remove an existing virtual LAN:
– Tick the box of the VLAN ID in the list
– Push the Remove VLAN button.
3.6.6.7 Port VLAN provisioning
This screen can be filled only if the 802.1Q bridge mode has been selected in Bridge provisioning screen.
Figure 93. Port VLAN provisioning
To configure the behavior of each user port you can:
– Select Admit all frames (to admit untagged frames and priority frames). For untagged frames at ingress:
• Select the VLAN ID in the proposed list. This list contains all the VLAN in which the port is involved.
• Select the priority in the list (from 0 to 7)
N.B. If you select VLAN ID = 1 and priority = X for an untagged flow, then priority = X will be taken into account for MSS QoS only. Indeed as VLAN 1 is removed at active MPT port egress, this untagged flow will go to default MPT QoS.
– Or select Admit Tag Frames Only. In this case untagged frames are dropped.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1146/308
3.6.6.8 Configuration file saving
Once each element has been configured (as explained in the previous paragraphs), press the Create but-ton and enter the name of the configuration file.
Note 1: When this file will be loaded into the NE in order to set up the Configuration, the behaviour of the NE will depend on the way the configuration has been realized.
Note 2: If you have selected Initial configuration or Reconfiguration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will reset and at start-up will send the new configuration.
Note 3: If you have selected Change Configuration, after the download of the configuration file into the NE, the NE will send directly the configuration to the NE. In this case the configuration can be modified, that is removing or creating some cross connections or VLANs or enabling or disabling user ports without impacting the traffic on unmodified circuits.
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 147/308
User Manual
NE Management by software application
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1148/308
4 Installation
4.1 Installation & Interconnection overview
The available different installations are shown in Figure 94. for MPT-MC and in Figure 95.-Figure 96. for MPT-HC.
Figure 94. Station interconnections with MPT-MC
Figure 95. Station interconnections with MPT-HC with Power Extractor
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 149/308
Figure 96. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to MSS-1c)
Figure 97. Station interconnections with MPT-HC (optical cable + coax. power supply cable to Station battery)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1150/308
4.2 Hardware Installation
– 4.2.1 - Power consumption on page 151
– 4.2.2 - Rack Installation on page 152
– 4.2.3 - MSS-1c installation on page 162
– 4.2.4 - MPT-HC Installation on page 168
– 4.2.5 - MPT-MC Installation on page 208
– 4.2.6 - Power Extractor on page 228
– 4.2.7 - Indoor Installation on page 229
– 4.2.8 - Antenna Alignment on page 237
4.2.1 Power consumption
Part Max. Power Consumption Typical Power Consumption
MSS-1c 17 W 13 W
FAN 2 W 2 W
MPT-HC 38 W 38 W
MPT-MC 40 W 40 W
Figures are for normal (not start-up) operation.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 151/308
4.2.2 Rack Installation
4.2.2.1 General
MSS-1c can be installed in 2 different ways:
– "ETSI (WTD) rack (21") (see par. 4.2.2.2 on page 152)
– Laborack (19") (par. 4.2.2.3 on page 157)
For each of the above type of installation special mechanical supporting fixtures are available.
Special mechanical fittings are provided for this type of installation, depending on the width of rack (19" or 21"). The examples show the fittings used to insert the equipment in ETSI racks (21"). For installation in 21" racks the adaptors are needed.
4.2.2.2 ETSI Rack Installation
4.2.2.2.1 Mechanical Installation
Installation has been sub-divided into the following phases:
– Rack Positioning and Fastening
– Fixing the rack to floor using expansion bolts or Fixing to floating floor;
– T.R.U. fastening to ETSI rack.
4.2.2.2.2 Rack Positioning and fastening
Proceed as follows:
– Refer to the plant documentation to see rack row assignment
– Fasten the rack to the station structure according to one of the following procedures
– Fixing the rack to floor
– Fixing the rack to floating floor
4.2.2.2.3 Fixing the rack to floor using expansion bolts
(Refer to Figure 98. and Figure 99.).
– Mount the rack in a vertical position in the desired place.
– Mark the base-plate with six holes (1) to be drilled on the floor.
– Temporarily remove the rack and drill the holes at the points drawn on the floor. Place the inserts into the holes.
– Secure the expander bolts to the floor through the base-plate holes.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1152/308
Figure 98. Fixing the Rack to Floor (1)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 153/308
Figure 99. Fixing the Rack to Floor (2)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1154/308
4.2.2.2.4 Fixing to floating floor
(Refer to Figure 100. and Figure 101.).
The drilling mask is the same used for concrete floor fastening.
In this case a hole must be created for the cables coming from the bottom according to Figure 100.
The rack fastening is to be mounted on the concrete floor below using a suitable stud as shown in Figure 100.
Using the row layout drawing, mark out the cable entry areas in the floor tiles and cut out with a jigsaw. Remember that the beginning of the row must be approved by the customer.
N.B. Unused or incompletely used cable entry areas should be blocked off with foam rubber.
Figure 100. Floor file drilling template
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 155/308
Figure 101. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1156/308
4.2.2.3 Laborack (19") installation
Figure 102. Laborack
The Laborack must be fixed to the floor by means of the four (4) screws.
(For more information see the manufacturer instructions).
When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19" unit, the front panel will hold the equipment by four screws fitted into the laborack cage nuts.
Fasten the IDU to the rack by inserting screws into holes of 19" mechanical adaptors and by screwing them into relevant holes provided with nut cage situated on rack brackets.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 157/308
4.2.2.4 Top Rack Unit
The Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) fastening to the rack guarantees the connection to the protection ground in that the rack is wired to the station protection ground.
Figure 103. Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.)
The T.R.U. is positioned on the top of the Rack and it is used to provide the Power Supply to the equipment.
Figure 104. Top Rack Unit - Front/Rear
The T.R.U. is fixed to the rack by means of two (2) screws.
Figure 105. Top Rack Unit - Fixed to rack
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1158/308
4.2.2.4.1 Top Rack Unit Components
Description Component Q.ty Particular View
Terminal Block 16mm² 2
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker Unipolar 6
Bus Bar Supply to 12 Fuse Carrier 1
Screws M6x16 with plastic Washer 4
Natched Clamp Nuts M6 4
Rail + Front 19" 1
4.2.2.4.2 Top Rack Unit Connections
The photos below show the connections from IDU to T.R.U.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 159/308
Figure 106. TRU Connections
4.2.2.4.3 Top Rack Unit Grounding
The rack must be grounded by means of a connection to the protection ground terminal of the site electrical plant.
The rack must be connected to the protection ground before performing any other electrical connection.
Figure 107. TRU Grounding position on Laborack
The rack is grounded to the station through a 16 to 25 mm2 (1 to 2 AWG) section cable (1) terminated onto the cable terminal lug (2).
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1160/308
Figure 108. ETSI Rack - Ground connection
Figure 109. Laborack - Ground connection
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 161/308
4.2.3 MSS-1c installation
Special brackets are provided depending on the equipment composition and on the width of the rack (19” or 21”).
MSS-1c (one or two) and the FAN unit must be first installed on the bracket by using the screws, provided with the brackets, and then the assembly must be installed on the rack.
Four installation configurations are available for installation in 19” rack:
1) One MSS-1c (Left mounting) + Bracket kit 3DB77052AAXX
2) One MSS-1c (Right mounting) + Bracket kit 3DB77052AAXX
3) Two MSS-1c + 1 Bracket 3DB77008ACXX
4) One MSS-1c + one FAN unit + 1 Bracket 3DB77008ACXX
For the installation in 21” rack the 21” Adapter kit (3CC50065AAAA) must be added to each 19” installation configuration.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1162/308
4.2.3.1 MSS-1c grounding
The assembly must be grounded by using the ground screw present on the bracket, as shown in Figure 110. and Figure 111.
The section cable (wire) is 6 mm² (9AWG) (Yellow/Green).
Figure 110. Grounding
Figure 111. Grounding
4.2.3.2 Power Supply Cable
Figure 112. Power supply connector
A power cable (2x1 mm2 - AWG12) is supplied (1AC007800068).
The blue wire must be connected to -48 Vdc (live); the black wire to ground/+ve.
The cable must be screwed to the MSS-1c and to the TRU.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 163/308
4.2.3.3 Installation of more than one MSS-1c in one rack
Several MSS-1c can be stacked in one rack, as shown in the following figures.
Figure 113. Installation solution
Figure 114. Installation solution
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1164/308
Figure 115. Installation solution
In case of Figure 113. no space is necessary from one MSS-1c assembly to another assembly; in case of Figure 114. and Figure 115. it is necessary to space the two assemblies of 1/2 U.
4.2.3.4 E1 External connections
The E1 streams must be connected to the available three E1 distributors by using the special cables as shown in Figure 116., Figure 117. and Figure 118..
(Note)
Figure 116. Interconnections to connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061AAAA)
Note: The cable has 8xE1, but only the first 2xE1s are used.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 165/308
(Note)
Figure 117. Interconnections to connector support BNC 75 ohm Panel 1U (3CC08061ABAA)
Note: The cable has 8xE1, but only the first 2xE1s are used.
9-161-88 OUT
8 IN
8 OUT
8 IN
(Note)
Figure 118. Interconnections to support 19 Inch modules 120 ohm Panel 3U (3CC07810AAAA)
Note: The cable has 8xE1, but only the first 2xE1s are used.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1166/308
The interconnections to the E1 distributor (3CC07810AAAA) are shown in the following two figures.
Figure 119.
Figure 120.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 167/308
4.2.4 MPT-HC Installation
The MPT-HC installation section is divided in:
– Types of MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.1 on page 169)
– MPT-HC operative information (par. 4.2.4.2 on page 171)
– How to change polarization in the MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.3 on page 179)
– Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits (par. 4.2.4.4 on page 181)
– Types of nose adapters (par. 4.2.4.5 on page 182)
– 1+0 MPT-HC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.4.6 on page 183)
– 1+0 MPT-HC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.4.7 on page 186)
– How to pull up the cables from indoor to the MPT-HC (par. 4.2.4.8 on page 188)
– Cable connection to MPT-HC (11-38 GHz) (par. 4.2.4.9 on page 193)
– Cable connection to MPT-HC (6-7-8 GHz) (par. 4.2.4.10 on page 198)
– Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) (par. 4.2.4.11 on page 201)
– MPT-HC system grounding (par. 4.2.4.12 on page 203)
– Cable Grounding (par. 4.2.4.13 on page 204)
– Type N connectors and Grounding kits waterproofing on the IDU/ODU cables (par. 4.2.4.14 on page 205)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1168/308
4.2.4.1 Types of MPT-HC
The MPT-HC consists of one or two cabinets including the Ethernet interface + modem + RF transceiver + branching of a channel.
Three mechanical solutions are adopted:
[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (11 GHz to 38 GHz), shown in Figure 121., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[2] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation and different mechanics from 11-38 GHz (6 GHz), shown in Figure 122., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-HC cabinet; this type of MPT-HC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[3] with external diplexer: due to an high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), shown in Figure 123., where MPT-HC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANS-CEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-HC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.
TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING MPT-HC IDENTIFICATION LABEL
CO-BOX
Figure 121. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 169/308
Figure 122. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz)
TRANSCEIVER
CO-BOX
BRANCHING
BRANCHINGIDENTIFICATION LABEL (INSIDE)
TRANSCEIVERIDENTIFICATION
LABEL
Figure 123. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1170/308
4.2.4.2 MPT-HC operative information
This paragraph gives operative information, for installation regarding:
– MPT-HC with embedded or external diplexer herebelow
– MPT-HC with external diplexer (additional information) on page 174
4.2.4.2.1 Operative information on MPT-HC with embedded or external diplexer
4.2.4.2.1.1 General, views and access points
Figure 124. on page 172 (for MPT-HC with embedded diplexer) and Figure 125. on page 173 (for MPT-HC with external diplexer) show MPT-HC views and access points.
The external interfaces are listed in Table 16. below, with the corresponding connector.
Table 16. MPT-HC external interfaces
Ref. in Figure 124.
and Figure 125.
Interface Connector Further information
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide Table 17. herebelow
(2) Connector for power supply coax. cable male N 50 ohm
(3) Hole for Ethernet connection (in the co-box) Gland for Cat5e or optical cable
(optional)
(4) Hole for connection to a second MPT-HC in 1+1 (in the co-box)
Not used
Table 17. RF interface
FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 7 8 11 13-15 18-26 38
Waveguide type -> WR137 WR112 WR112 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 171/308
(1) (A)
(A)(A)
(A)
(2)
(3) (4)
RJ45SFP for 1+1 configuration
(not used)
Place to install the optional SFP plug-in
OPENING THE CO-BOX
(A) Locking hooks (4) to fix/unfix MPT-HC assembly to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.
Figure 124. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (11-38 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1172/308
(1) (A)
(A)(A)
(A)(2)
(B)(B)
(B)(B)
(3)
(4)
SFP for 1+1 configuration(not used)
Place to install the optional SFP for optical connection
OPENING THE CO-BOX
RJ45 for electrical connection
(A) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver
(B) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.
Figure 125. Views of MPT-HC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 173/308
(1) (A)
(A)(A)
(A)(2)
(3)
(4)
SFP for 1+1 configuration(not used)
Place to install the optional SFP for optical connection
OPENING THE CO-BOX
RJ45 for electrical connection
(A) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.
Figure 126. Views of MPT-HC with embedded diplexer (6 GHz)
4.2.4.2.2 Additional operative information on MPT-HC with external diplexer
4.2.4.2.2.1 MPT-HC composition
As shown in Figure 127., the MPT-HC assembly is made up of two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the MPT-HC.
An O-RING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the MPT-HC assembly waterproofness.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1174/308
N.B. This is a conductive O-RING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon grease must be used only on O-ring between MPT-HC and antenna).
BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
Figure 127. Composition of MPT-HC with external diplexer
WARNING 1: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-HC. It must never be removed.
WARNING 2: This gasket must never be removed.
The TRANSCEIVER box performs all the functions, but does not include the diplexer system.
The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the TRANS-CEIVER.
The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without dis-connecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCH-ING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers.
4.2.4.2.2.2 TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling
Figure 128. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:
– (A) BRANCHING box label informative contentdescribed in Figure 131. on page 178
– (B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box
– (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box
The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (180°-rotated with respect to each other):
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 175/308
– BRANCHING box (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 131. on page 178); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding LOW frequency range;
– BRANCHING box (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 131. on page 178); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding HIGH frequency range.
(A) (B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Figure 128. MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces
N.B. There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box: there is a mistake-proofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Figure 129.) to ensure that the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one.
Hole
Mistake-proofing
Figure 129. 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1176/308
4.2.4.2.3 Labels affixed on the MPT-HC
a) The label depicted in Figure 130. below is affixed externally to all types of MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER boxes;
b) Only for MPT-HC with external diplexers, an additional label, depicted in Figure 131. on page 178, is placed on the branching assembly.
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
9500-MPR Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo
CE European Community logo
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Elec-tronic Equipment) Logo
-28 V / -58 V 1,6 A / 0,8 A Power supply range and current range
Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer
A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
Serial n° (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number
B Factory Serial number bar code 128
TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as examples) Working frequency range
Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter
TX Sub-band (shown numbers as examples) TX Sub-band
Initial SW/ICS (shown numbers as examples) P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory
PN/ICS (shown numbers as examples) Factory P/N + ICS
C Factory P/N + ICS bar code 128
Figure 130. Label affixed on the MPT-HC and MPT-HC TRANSCEIVER box
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 177/308
N.B. In the label A9400 is written because the diplexers are also used in A9400 AWY.
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo
CE European Community logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Elec-tronic Equipment) Logo
PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS
A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128
Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer
B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number
C Factory Serial number bar code 128
D (shown numbers as examples) – the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible frequency bands that can be used with this branching assembly. The choice between different shifters is done byCraft Terminal;
– for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and “HIGH” rows indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver TX section, accord-ing to the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling.
Figure 131. Label affixed inside the MPT-HC BRANCHING box
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1178/308
4.2.4.3 How to change polarization in the MPT-HC
4.2.4.3.1 11-38 GHz MPT-HC
1 2
3
Remove the plastic protection cap from the MPT-HC.
Change the polarization of the MPT-HC, if required (default: vertical polarization).To rotate the polarization use the Allen wrench.
Horizontal polarization.
Protection cover
Unscrew the 2 screwsand rotate by 45°
The polarization must be changed to match the antenna polarization and the coupler nose waveguide.
The polarization must be turned to horizontal when assembling the MPT-HC on a coupler.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 179/308
4.2.4.3.2 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC
These MPT-HC have fixed polarization (vertical polarization). To change the polarization it is necessary to change the antenna polarization and to install the MPT-HC 90° rotated.
1 2Example of vertical polarization. Example of horizontal polarization.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1180/308
4.2.4.4 Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits
– Integrated antenna Pole Mounting Installation kits
– "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kits
4.2.4.4.1 Integrated antenna Pole Mounting Installation kits
These integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are designed for quick mechanical installation, and:
– are included inside the chosen antenna kit.
– foresee the “Fine Tuning” for the positioning of the Antenna.
As shown in Figure 132., these integrated antenna Pole Mounting kits are supplied with the frequency-specific nose adapter for mounting the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Coupler.
In general, the nose adapter:
– in case of smallest antennas, is already mounted on the antenna
– in case of largest antennas, is supplied separately, and must be mounted on the antenna during the installation procedure.
Figure 132. Example of integrated antenna Pole Mounting (with antenna and nose adapter)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 181/308
4.2.4.4.2 "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kits
These kits are frequency independent, and provide only the mechanical support function. The frequency specialization is obtained mounting the frequency-specific nose adapter.
N.B.: The nose adapter shown is not included in the kit.
Figure 133. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" Installation kit (3DB10137AAXX)
4.2.4.5 Types of nose adapters
In case of:
– integrated antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered inside the chosen antenna kit; in this case the RF interface is used to attach the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Cou-pler.
– Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is used to attach:
• at one side, the frequency-specific MPT-HC transceiver or RF Coupler
• at the other side, to attach the Flextwist cable toward the antenna.
In these Non Integrated Antenna configurations, the nose adapter is delivered as individual item, and must be always mounted on the ODU or Coupler, during the installation procedure.
The mounting accessories are delivered with the nose adapter.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1182/308
4.2.4.6 1+0 MPT-HC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies
[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-HC with external diplexer).
[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting.This pole mounting is delivered as “pole mounting”, “antenna”, and frequency-specific “nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
[3] Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose.To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna. Figure below shows an example.
N.B. The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.
Figure 134. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-HC integrated antenna)
[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-HC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.
[5] Install the MPT-HC on the Antenna nose adapter.
N.B. Before inserting the MPT-HC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 183/308
Putting silicone grease
Figure 135. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion
1) Grasp the MPT-HC module by the handle.
2) Open the four looking hooks (1) arranged on the four walls of the MPT-HC unit.
3) For 6-7-8 GHz MPT-HC only rotate the MPT-HC depending on the horizontal or vertical polar-ization, and slide it on the nose adapter.
4) Secure the MPT-HC module through the four hooks (1) on the relative brackets (2).
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 136. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (11-38 GHz)
N.B. For 11-38 GHz MPT-HC remember to set first the correct polarization.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1184/308
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 137. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: vertical polarization)
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 138. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)
REMINDER: The MPT-HC/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the two ends are smooth. The O-ring seal around the male “nose” provides sealing.
[6] Ground the MPT-HC system.
[7] Pre-point the antenna.
[8] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-HC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.
[9] Affix the EMF stickers.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 185/308
4.2.4.7 1+0 MPT-HC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies
[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-HC with external diplexer).
[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.
[3] Install the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
N.B. The pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower.
Figure 139. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation
[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-HC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.
[5] Install the MPT-HC.
N.B. Before inserting the MPT-HC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.
Putting silicone grease
Figure 140. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-HC insertion
1) Grasp the MPT-HC module by the handle. Open the four looking hooks arranged on the four walls of the MPT-HC unit.
2) Position the Pole mounting support on the pole side as shown in the plant documentation.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1186/308
3) Position the MPT-HC and slide it on the nose adapter.
4) Secure the MPT-HC module through the four hooks onto the relative brackets.
Figure 141. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (11-38 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB)
Figure 142. MPT-HC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (6-7-8 GHz with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAXX)
[6] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting.The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
[7] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mounting’s nose adapter to the external antenna, by means of the “Flextwist“ waveguide.
[8] Ground the MPT-HC system.
[9] Pre-point the antenna.
[10] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-HC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.
[11] Affix the EMF stickers.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 187/308
4.2.4.8 How to pull up the cables from indoor to the MPT-HC
4.2.4.8.1 Optical fiber
1 2
3 4
Take the optical fiber cable of the suitable length.
Take the Hoisting grip tool.
Insert the fiber in the hoisting grip tool.
5 6Screw the gland body to the hoisting grip until the end of stroke with a fixed spanner.
7 8 Fix the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10N).
Gland nutGland body
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1188/308
9 10Take a cord and insert it in the hoisting grip tool.
Make a knot on the cord and pull up with the cord the hoisting grip tool.
11 The overlength of the optical fiber must be rolled up in the Cable overlength box.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 189/308
4.2.4.8.2 Electrical Ethernet cable
N.B. The cable must be terminated on field.
N.B. Install the gland before terminating the cable.
3 4
5 6
Take the terminated electrical cable and protect the RJ45 with a tape.
Take a 35 cm reference on the cable.
1 Inser the gland on the cable: first insert the gland nut, then the gland seal, last the gland body.
Terminate the Ethernet cable with the RJ45 connector (1AB074610027) according to the plug assembling instructions included in the relevant tool provided in the Special tool bag (3CC50098AAAA).
2
Gland body Gland seal Gland nut
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1190/308
7 8Sign 1.5 cm from the reference. Sign 3 cm from the reference.
9 10Remove the sheath of the cable from 1.5 cm to 3 cm from the reference.
Insert the cable in the hoisting grip tool.
11 12Insert the cable in the hoisting grip tool. Screw the gland body to the hoisting grip until the end of stroke with a fixed spanner.
Gland body
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 191/308
Make a knot on the cord and pull up with the cord the hoisting grip tool.
17
Take a cord and insert it in the hoisting grip tool.
13 14
15 16
Gland nut
Fix the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10N).
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1192/308
4.2.4.9 Cable connection to MPT-HC (11-38 GHz)
4.2.4.9.1 Electrical cable installation
1 2
3 4
5 6
Remove the cap on the left side. Take a 35 cm reference on the cable and put a tape as reference length.
Insert the cable on the hole. Take the gland body, move it on the hole.
Glandbody
Fix the gland body until the end of stroke and push the seal in its seat.
Fix the gland nut by the hand.
Remove
Glandnut
Glandbody
Seal Reference
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 193/308
Make a loop on the cable.
Remove the tape from the RJ45 connector. 10
11
Climp the yellow boot on the cable.
Put the boot on the RJ45 connector. 12
9
Boot
7 8Pull back the cable until the reference is visible near the gland nut.
Tighten the body and then the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench (10 N).
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1194/308
15 End of cable connection.
13 14 Connect the RJ45 connector on the MPT-HC connector and close the co-box.
Position of the cable with loop.
Warning: The Power Supply connection must be made waterproof:
1) Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down
2) Surround the connector with the adhesive tape from up to down
3) Put tie raps on the up and the down of the connector
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 195/308
4.2.4.9.2 Optical fiber cable installation
1 2
3 4
5 6
Insert the SFP on the MPT-HC. Insert the optical fiber on the hole.
Gland
Fix the gland body.Take the gland body and move it on the hole.
Tighten the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench.
Remove the protection caps from the fiber connectors.
Warning: The end of the heat-shrink tube reference must be outside the gland.
Reference
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1196/308
7 8
9
Take the optical conectors and ... ... connect them on the MPT-HC. Close the co-box.
End of optical fiber connection.
Warning: The Power Supply connection must be made waterproof:
1) Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down
2) Surround the connector with the adhesive tape from up to down
3) Put tie raps on the up and the down of the connector
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 197/308
4.2.4.10 Cable connection to MPT-HC (6-7-8 GHz)
4.2.4.10.1 Electrical cable installation
1 2
3 4
6
Open the co-box.
Move the gland nut and tighten it with the dynamometric wrench.
End of cable connection.5 Insert the yellow boot on the RJ45 connector and insert it in the co-box. Close the co-box.
Remove the cap from “User” and insert the cable on the hole. Tighten the gland body with the dynamometric wrench.
User
Gland nut
Take a 29 cm reference on the cable and put a tape as reference length.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1198/308
4.2.4.10.2 Optical fiber cable installation
1 2
3 4
5 6
Open the co-box. Insert the SFP module.
Move the gland body and tighten it with the dynamometric wrench.
Remove the cap from “User” and insert the optical fiber on the hole.
Tighten the gland nut with the dynamometric wrench.
Remove the protection caps from the fiber connectors, insert them in the SFP. Close the co-box.
Warning: The reference must be outside the co-box and the gland nut.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 199/308
7 End of optical fiber connection.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1200/308
4.2.4.11 Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases)
Concerning the interface between the MPT-HC output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the fol-lowing Table 18. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the external antenna.
Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm diam-eter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.
Table 18. MPT-HC Output flanges with external antenna
Range (GHz)
MPT-HC Output Flange
FLEXTWIST Suggested Antenna Flange
C.E.I. E.I.A.
6 UBR70 R70 WR137 PDR70 UDR70 PDR70
7-8
UDR84 R84 WR112 PDR84 UBR84 PBR84
or
UBR84 R84 WR112 PBR84 UBR84 PBR84
11 UBR100 R100 WR90 PBR100 UBR100 PBR100
13 UBR120 R120 WR75 PBR120 UBR120 PBR120
15 UBR140 R140 WR62 PBR140 UBR140 PBR140
18
UBR220 R220 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 PBR22023
26
38 UBR320 R320 WR28 PBR320 UBR320 PBR320
The long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end, it has a smooth square or rectangular flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved square flange designed to accommodate an O–ring seal (mounted at the MPT-HC end).
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 201/308
Table 19. 6-7-8GHz Flextwist waveguide
FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT
Alc
atel
-Luc
ent c
ode
Wav
egui
de
Leng
th m
m.
Freq
. Ban
d G
Hz
Flan
ges
Stai
nles
s st
eel
sock
et c
ap s
crew
s
Stai
nles
s st
eel
sock
et c
ap s
crew
s
“Ond
ufle
x” s
prin
gy
crin
kle
was
hers
Stai
nles
s Z.
fla
t was
hers
HM
. Hex
nut
s
1AF02951ABAA WR137 1000 6 PDR70 UDR70 8 (M4x25)
8 (M4x12)
8 (B4)
8 (Z4)
8 (HM4)
3CC08010ABAB WR112 1000 7,05–10 PBR84 UBR84 8 (M4x25)
8 (M4x12)
8 (B4)
8 (Z4)
8 (HM4)
Table 20. 11-38GHz Flextwist waveguide
FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT
Alc
atel
-Luc
ent c
ode
Wav
egui
de
Leng
th m
m.
Freq
. Ban
d G
Hz
Flan
ges
Stai
nles
s st
eel
sock
et c
ap s
crew
s
Stai
nles
s st
eel
sock
et c
ap s
crew
s
“Ond
ufle
x” s
prin
gy
crin
kle
was
hers
Stai
nles
s Z.
fla
t was
hers
HM
. Hex
nut
s
1AF02957ABAA WR90 1000 11 PBR100 UBR100 8 (M4x20)
8 (M4x12)
8 (B4)
12 (Z4)
12 (HM4)
3CC05751ACAA WR75 600 10 – 15,0 PBR120 UBR120 8 (M4x20)
8 (M4x12)
8 (B4)
12 (Z4)
12 (HM4)
3CC05750ACAA WR62 600 12,4 – 18 PBR140 UBR140 8 (M4x20)
8 (M4x12)
8 (B4)
8 (Z4)
8 (HM4)
3CC05749ACAA WR42 600 18 – 26,5 PBR220 UBR220 8 (M3x20)
8 (M3x12)
8 (B3)
8 (Z3)
8 (HM3)
3DB00682AAAA WR28 600 26,5 – 40 PBR320 UBR320 8 (M3x20)
8 (M3x12)
8 (B3)
8 (Z3)
8 (HM3)
N.B. If the FLEX–TWIST is not provided by Alcatel, the user must carefully choose the type of the connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between ANTENNA/flex–twist and flex–twist/MPT-HC contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose please note that the surfaces are:
– chromium-plated at MPT-HC output flange side
– tin-plated at flex-twist’s flange side
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1202/308
4.2.4.12 MPT-HC system grounding
Each MPT-HC transceiver must be individually grounded.
N.B. Neither the RF coupler, nor the antenna(s), integrated or not integrated, must be grounded.
The following items are necessary for the individual grounding of each MPT-HC transceiver:
– one MPT-HC Grounding Kit (P/N 3CC08166AAXX). This kit corresponds to a cable (16mm2) that must be cut on site and connected to the terminal pro-vided on the MPT-HC transceiver, and, on the other side, to the nearest grounding plate;
This example figure shows the grounding connector position.
MPT-HC grounding connector:to be connected with thegrounding cable to the nearestgrounding plate
Connect all grounding cables to the nearest grounding plate, as shown in this example:
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 203/308
4.2.4.13 Cable Grounding
The Power Supply cable and the Ethernet electrical cable must be grounded by using the dedicated Grounding kits.
For ground kit installation instructions refer to the guide provided with each kit.
For tower/mast installations the cables must be grounded at:
– The point where it comes on to the tower from the MPT-HC
– The point where it leaves the tower to go to the equipment building
– Not more than 25 m intervals on the tower if the height on the tower exceeds 50 m
– A point just prior to building entry
Figure 143. shows typical tower locations for cable grounding.
At non-standard installations, such as building tops or the sides of buildings, follow the same general guidelines but where proper grounding points are not provided these must first be installed.
MPT & antenna
Cable ground
MPT ODU ground wire
Cable ground Cable ground
Cable carrier
ground bar
Site grounding
Rack ground bar
Cable supported by black cable ties at not more than 1 m intervals. Must not run adjacent to tower lightning ground or electrical cables
Install additional cable grounds at not more than 25 m intervals if the height of cable on the tower exceeds 50 m
Figure 143. Locations for Cable Grounds
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1204/308
4.2.4.14 Type N connectors and Grounding kits waterproofing on the IDU/ODU cables
For installation on the type N connectors and grounding kits please refer to the installation notice provided with the connector and the grounding kit.
IMPORTANT:
To prevent potential risks of dysfunction it is recommended and a particular attention will be carried in the realization of the waterproofing of connectings (see following page).For the holding in the bad weather, do not forget the waterproofing at the end of the operation with the Self auto-amalgamating + UV protection vinyl tape by necklaces Colson / Tie raps in every extremity.For the assembly between the cable, grounding kit and ODU realized outside, it is recommended to use the Self auto-amalgamating (several turns) to assure the waterproofing. Then to cover the set by the UV protection vinyl tape to avoid the unsticking of the self-amalgamating and ended with a necklace Colson / Tie raps.
4.2.4.14.1 Example of Connector N waterproofing
4.2.4.14.2 Example of N Connector & Waterproofing
The principle of waterproofing given above is valid for the connections cable / ODU and for the grounding kits of the coaxial cable. It is recommended to make this waterproofing by "dry" weather, to avoid locking the humidity into the system.
Surround the connector with the adhesive UV tape from up to down
Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape from up to down
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 205/308
Put necklace Colson / tie raps on the up and the down of the connector
4.2.4.14.3 Example of Grounding Kit & Waterproofing
In every kit for Power Supply cable and in every kit for Ethernet electrical cable is joined a detailed assem-bling instruction.
Make then the Installation of the kit on the coaxial cable by not forgetting the waterproofing as example below.
Example of realization. Detail of the waterproofing of the kit.
Metal contact
Install grounding kit
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1206/308
Waterproofing with Almagamating + UV protection vinyl tape + Necklace Colson / Tie rap
Thighten with allen key 8 mm
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 207/308
4.2.5 MPT-MC Installation
The MPT-MC installation section is divided in:
– Types of MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.1 on page 209)
– MPT-MC operative information (par. 4.2.5.2 on page 210)
– How to change polarization in the MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.3 on page 217)
– Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits (par. 4.2.5.4 on page 218)
– Types of nose adapters (par. 4.2.5.5 on page 218)
– 1+0 MPT-MC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.5.6 on page 219)
– 1+0 MPT-MC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies (par. 4.2.5.7 on page 222)
– How to terminate the Ethernet cable (MPT-MC side) and to pull up it from Indoor to MPT-MC (par. 4.2.5.8 on page 224)
– Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) (par. 4.2.5.9 on page 227)
– MPT-MC system grounding (par. 4.2.5.10 on page 227)
– Cable Grounding (par. 4.2.5.11 on page 227)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1208/308
4.2.5.1 Types of MPT-MC
The MPT-MC consists of one or two cabinets including the Ethernet interface + modem + RF transceiver + branching of a channel.
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:
[1] with embedded diplexer for cost optimisation (6 GHz and 11 GHz to 38 GHz), shown in Figure 144., where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the MPT-MC cabinet; this type of MPT-MC is identified by one Logistical Item only;
[2] with external diplexer: due to an high number of shifters the diplexer is external for the flexibility of the shifter customization (7 GHz and 8 GHz), shown in Figure 145., where MPT-MC is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the RF TRANS-CEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of MPT-MC is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.
TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING
Figure 144. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 209/308
Figure 145. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)
4.2.5.2 MPT-MC operative information
This paragraph gives operative information, for installation regarding:
– MPT-MC with embedded or external diplexer herebelow
– MPT-MC with external diplexer (additional information) on page 212
4.2.5.2.1 Operative information on MPT-MC with embedded or external diplexer
4.2.5.2.1.1 General, views and access points
Figure 146. on page 211 (for MPT-MC with embedded diplexer) and Figure 147. on page 211 (for MPT-MC with external diplexer) show MPT-MC views and access points.
The external interfaces are listed in Table 21. below, with the corresponding connector.
Table 21. MPT-MC external interfaces
Ref. in Figure 146.
and Figure 147.
Interface Connector Further information
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide Table 22. herebelow
(2) Ethernet electrical cable R2CT
Table 22. RF interface
FREQUENCY GHz -> 6 7 8 11 13-15 18-26 38
Waveguide type -> WR137 WR112 WR112 WR75 WR62 WR42 WR28
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1210/308
(1) (A)
(A)(A)
(A)
(2)
(A) Locking hooks (4) to fix/unfix MPT-MC assembly to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.
Figure 146. Views of MPT-MC with embedded diplexer (6 and 11-38 GHz)
(1) (A)
(A)(A)
(A)
(B)(B)
(B)(B)(2)
(A) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver
(B) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler. Remove the plastic cover.WARNING: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.
Figure 147. Views of MPT-MC with external diplexer (7 GHz and 8 GHz)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 211/308
4.2.5.2.2 Additional operative information on MPT-MC with external diplexer
4.2.5.2.2.1 MPT-MC composition
As shown in Figure 148., the MPT-MC assembly is made up of two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the MPT-MC.
An O-RING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the MPT-MC assembly waterproofness.
N.B. This is a conductive O-RING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon grease must be used only on O-ring between MPT-MC and antenna).
BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER
WARNING 1 WARNING 2
Figure 148. Composition of MPT-MC with external diplexer
WARNING 1: A waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the MPT-MC. It must never be removed.
WARNING 2: This gasket must never be removed.
The TRANSCEIVER box performs all the functions, but does not include the diplexer system.
The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the TRANS-CEIVER.
The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without dis-connecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCH-ING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1212/308
4.2.5.2.2.2 TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling
Figure 149. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:
– (A) BRANCHING box label informative contentdescribed in Figure 152. on page 216
– (B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box
– (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box
The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (180°-rotated with respect to each other):
– BRANCHING box (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 152. on page 216); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding LOW frequency range;
– BRANCHING box (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER box’s (D) (TX)in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by the Craft Terminal (see field D in Figure 152. on page 216); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding HIGH frequency range.
(A) (B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Figure 149. MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces
N.B. There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box: there is a mistake-proofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Figure 150.) to ensure that the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 213/308
Hole
Mistake-proofing
Figure 150. 7-8 GHz MPT-MC BRANCHING box mistake-proofing
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1214/308
4.2.5.2.3 Labels affixed on the MPT-MC
a) The label depicted in Figure 151. below is affixed externally to all types of MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER boxes;
b) Only for MPT-MC with external diplexers, an additional label, depicted in Figure 152. on page 216, is placed on the branching assembly.
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
9500-MPR Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo
CE European Community logo
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Elec-tronic Equipment) Logo
-28 V / -58 V 1,6 A / 0,8 A Power supply range and current range
Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer
A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
Serial n° (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number
B Factory Serial number bar code 128
TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as examples) Working frequency range
Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter
TX Sub-band (shown numbers as examples) TX Sub-band
Initial SW/ICS (shown numbers as examples) P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory
PN/ICS (shown numbers as examples) Factory P/N + ICS
C Factory P/N + ICS bar code 128
Figure 151. Label affixed on the MPT-MC and MPT-MC TRANSCEIVER box
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 215/308
N.B. In the label A9400 is written because the diplexers are also used in A9400 AWY.
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
A9400 Equipment Acronym & Alcatel-Lucent Logo
CE European Community logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Elec-tronic Equipment) Logo
PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS
A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128
Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer
B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number
C Factory Serial number bar code 128
D (shown numbers as examples) – the field “Shifter MHz” indicates the possible frequency bands that can be used with this branching assembly. The choice between different shifters is done byCraft Terminal;
– for each “Shifter MHz”, the TX “LOW” and “HIGH” rows indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver TX section, accord-ing to the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling.
Figure 152. Label affixed inside the MPT-MC BRANCHING box
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1216/308
4.2.5.3 How to change polarization in the MPT-MC
4.2.5.3.1 6 and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC
1 2
3
Remove the plastic protection cover from the MPT-MC.
Change the polarization of the MPT-MC, if required (default: vertical polarization).To rotate the polarization use the Allen wrench.
Horizontal polarization.
Protection cover
Unscrew the 2 screwsand rotate by 45°
Polarizationreference
Polarizationreference
The polarization must be changed to match the antenna polarization and the coupler nose waveguide.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 217/308
4.2.5.3.2 7-8 GHz MPT-MC
These MPT-MC have fixed polarization (vertical polarization). To change the polarization it is necessary to change the antenna polarization and to install the MPT-MC 90° rotated.
1 2Example of vertical polarization (left offset). Example of horizontal polarization (left offset).
3 4Example of vertical polarization (right offset).
Example of horizontal polarization (right offset).
4.2.5.4 Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits
Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.4 on page 181.
4.2.5.5 Types of nose adapters
Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.5 on page 182.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1218/308
4.2.5.6 1+0 MPT-MC installation (integrated antenna) - all frequencies
[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-MC with external diplexer).
[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting.This pole mounting is delivered as “pole mounting”, “antenna”, and frequency-specific “nose adapter” already assembled. The integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
[3] Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose.To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna. Figure below shows an example.
N.B. The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.
Figure 153. Example of antenna polarization change (“1+0” MPT-MC integrated antenna)
[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-MC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.
[5] Install the MPT-MC on the Antenna nose adapter.
N.B. Before inserting the MPT-MC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 219/308
Putting silicone grease
Figure 154. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion
1) Grasp the MPT-MC module by the handle.
2) Open the four looking hooks (1) arranged on the four walls of the MPT-MC unit.
3) For 7-8 GHz MPT-MC only rotate the MPT-MC depending on the horizontal or vertical polar-ization, and slide it on the nose adapter.
4) Secure the MPT-MC module through the four hooks (1) on the relative brackets (2).
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 155. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (6 GHz and 11-38 GHz)
N.B. For 6 GHz and 11-38 GHz MPT-MC remember to set first the correct polarization.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1220/308
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 156. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: vertical polarization)
(1) Hook
(2) Bracket
Figure 157. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for integrated antenna (7-8 GHz: horizontal polarization)
REMINDER: The MPT-MC/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the two ends are smooth. The O-ring seal around the male “nose” provides sealing.
[6] Ground the MPT-MC system.
[7] Pre-point the antenna.
[8] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-MC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.
[9] Affix the EMF stickers.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 221/308
4.2.5.7 1+0 MPT-MC installation (non integrated antenna) - all frequencies
[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for MPT-MC with external diplexer).
[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.
[3] Install the “Pole Mounting for Remote ODU”.Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.In case of missing instructions, fix the U-bolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
N.B. The pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole depending on the azimuth and on the configuration of the tower.
Figure 158. "Pole Mounting for Remote ODU" installation
[4] Take off the solar shield from the MPT-MC transceiver by unscrewing the screws placed on the solar shield back panel.
[5] Install the MPT-MC.
N.B. Before inserting the MPT-MC on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease on the O-ring.
Putting silicone grease
Figure 159. Putting silicone grease on O-ring before MPT-MC insertion
1) Grasp the MPT-MC module by the handle. Open the four looking hooks arranged on the four walls of the MPT-MC unit.
2) Position the Pole mounting support on the pole side as shown in the plant documentation.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1222/308
3) Position the MPT-MC and slide it on the nose adapter.
4) Secure the MPT-MC module through the four hooks onto the relative brackets.
Figure 160. MPT-MC 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB 10137 AAAB)
[6] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting.The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
[7] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mounting’s nose adapter to the external antenna, by means of the “Flextwist“ waveguide.
[8] Ground the MPT-MC system.
[9] Pre-point the antenna.
[10] Reinstall the solar shield onto the MPT-MC transceiver by screwing on it the solar shield screws.
[11] Affix the EMF stickers.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 223/308
4.2.5.8 How to terminate the Ethernet cable (MPT-MC side) and to pull up it from Indoor to MPT-MC
To terminate the cable the Short kit plug R2CT must be used.
The kit is made up of 10 items as shown in Figure 162.
Figure 161. Short kit plug R2CT
Figure 162. Short kit plug R2CT items
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1224/308
To terminate and to connect the cable to the MPT-MC follow the instructions:
1 2Turn and remove the protection cap. Unscrew partially the nut spiral.
3 Pass the cable through the mini short kit plug and crimp the RJ45 plug according to the standardprocedure
4 5Insert the RJ45 plug inside the unlocking clip (keep attention to have the latches mechanisms on the same side )
Pull the cable and insert the unlocking clip together with the RJ45 plug inside the body,
the latches being aligned with the body bayonet pin. Place the body arm on the left side.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 225/308
6 If you need to hoist the assembly, pull the coupling nut so as to cover the plug body and put back the protection cap on
9 10Align the two marks on the plug body and the receptacle, insert and rotate clockwise the plug body into the receptacle
Connect the RJ45 plug to its socket by pushing the cable.
7 Tighten the nut spiral with a 21 mm wrench with a torque of 3N.m mini and 3,5 maxi. The cable is now fixed with the plug and ready to be pulled.
8 Install the cable then unscrew partially the nut spiral and remove the protection cap to connect to the receptacle
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1226/308
11 Secure the assembly by screwing the nut spiral with a 21mm wrench with a torque of 3 N.m mini and 3,5 N.m maxi
12Push and rotate clockwise the coupling nut until secured onto the receptacle
4.2.5.9 Installing the “Flextwist“ waveguide (not integrated antenna cases)
Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.11 on page 201.
4.2.5.10 MPT-MC system grounding
Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.12 on page 203.
4.2.5.11 Cable Grounding
Refer to paragraph 4.2.4.13 on page 204.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 227/308
4.2.6 Power Extractor
With the Power Extractor, to be installed close to the MPT-HC, the interconnection between the MSS and the MPT-HC can be made with a single electrical Ethernet cable by using the “Power Feed over Ethernet” solution (Ethernet traffic and Power Supply on the same cable). The Power Extractor then separates the Power Supply from the Ethernet traffic, which are separately sent to the MPT-HC.
The two cables, interconnecting the Power Extractor to the MPT-HC (the Power Supply cable to be con-nected to the DC Out connector of the Power Extractor and Ethernet cable to be connected to the Data Out connector of the Power Extractor), are provided, already terminated (2 m long), with the Power Extractor itself.
To prepare and to terminate the “Ethernet data + Power Supply” cable (to be connected to MSS and to the DC+Data In connector of the Power Extractor) follow the instructions given in para. 4.2.5.8 on page 224.
The R2CT connector used to terminate the cable (Power Extractor side) is provided with the Power Extractor.
3 4Connect the 3 cables (2 cables to the MPT-HC and 1 cable to the MSS).
The final installation is shown in the figure.
1 Install the Power Extractor on the pole close to the MPT-HC.
Connect the Power Extractor to the ground by using the 6 mm2 grounding cable pro-vided with the Power Extractor.
2
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1228/308
4.2.7 Indoor Installation
This section includes:
– Indoor accessories (par. 4.2.7.1 on page 229)
– Indoor cables (par. 4.2.7.2 on page 230)
– Accessories and cables for MPT-HC connections (par. 4.2.7.3 on page 230)
– Accessories and cables for MPT-MC connections (par. 4.2.7.4 on page 232)
– Nose Adapter for MPT-HC and MPT-MC (par. 4.2.7.5 on page 232)
– Flextwists for MPT-HC and MPT-MC (par. 4.2.7.6 on page 233)
– Ethernet Electrical Cables (par. 4.2.7.7 on page 233)
– Ethernet Optical Cables (par. 4.2.7.8 on page 233)
– E1 Connectors on the front panel of the MSS-1c (par. 4.2.7.9 on page 235)
4.2.7.1 Indoor accessories
1AD137820001 TRU: Power Distribution with 1 Input 48VDC and 6 breakers 16A
1AD137830001 TRU: Power Distribution with 1 Input 48VDC and 12 breakers 16A
3CC50042AAAA ETSI Rack mounting kit (valid for TRU 1AD137820001, TRU 1AD137830001, support 19" module 120 ohm 3CC07810AAAA)
3CC07810AAAA Distributor subrack for 120 ohm EMC (Panel 3U)
3CC08061AAAA Connector support 1.6/5.6 75 ohm (Panel 1U)
3CC08061ABAA Connector support BNC 75 ohm (Panel 1U)
1AD114560001 Laborack (19" rack)
3DB04656AAAA ETSI rack (H2200 21" rack)
3DB18171ABAA DIN Bracket
3DB18159ABAA ETSI bracket
3CC13424AAAA Rack grounding kit
3CC06503AAAA Consumable kit
1AF15185AAAA IP Phone
3CC50065AAAA Adaptor bracket kit 1U ETSI (valid for 3CC08062AAAA, 3CC08061AAAA, 3CC08061ABAA)
3DB77052AAXX Bracket (for one MSS-1c left/right mounting)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 229/308
4.2.7.2 Indoor cables
1AC041800001 24V DC 3G power supply cable (2x16mm2) (from Station battery to TRU)
1AC007800068 MSS-1c power supply cable 2x1mm2
3CC52183AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 120 ohm L = 1m 45° (37 pin)
3CC52182AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm 1.5/5.6 L = 1m 45° (37 pin)
3CC52181AAXX Cable 8XE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm BNC L = 1m 45° (37 pin)
3CC50152AAXX Cable 8xE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 75 ohm coax Free L = 15m (37 pin)
3CC50151AAXX Cable 8xE1 MSS-1c-DISTRIBUTOR 120 ohm Free Wires L = 10m (37 pin)
3CC52015AAXX Cable, Trib E1, RJ45 to wire-wrap L = 5m
3CC52020AAXX RJ45 to RJ45 E1 cross-over cable
4.2.7.3 Accessories and cables for MPT-HC connections
3DB77008ACXX Bracket (for one MSS-1c + one FAN unit or two MSS-1c mounting)
3CC50065AAAA Kit 21”
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 ohm (diam.=10.3 mm) for L>200 m
1AB095530023 Conn. male straigth 50 ohm (diam.=10.3 mm)
1AB128500002 Cable grounding kit (diam.=10.3 mm)
1AC041350001 Coax. cable 50 ohm (diam.=6.85 mm) for L<200 m
1AB095530036 N Conn. Male straigth 50 ohm for coax. cable (diam.=6.85 mm)
1AD040130004 Grounding kit for coax. cable (diam.=6.85 mm)
1AC016760006 IDU-ODU Ethernet cable Cat5e shield 80% for outdoor environment
1AB074610027 RJ45 connector (boot included)
1AD160490001 Tool for HIROSE RJ45 IDU-ODU cable assembling
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1230/308
1AB150990002 Short kit plug R2CT
1AF17000AAAA Hoisting protection tube (for ethernet or fiber cord)
1AD040130004 Grounding kit for RJ45 Ethernet electrical cable
3CC08166AAXX ODU Grounding kit
3CC52160ALAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection80m pre-assembled fiber cable + gland
3CC52160AAAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection100m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160ABAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection120m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160ACAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection140m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160ADAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection160m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160AEAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection180m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160AFAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection200m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160AGAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection220m pre-assembled fiber able+ gland
3CC52160AHAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection250m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC52160AIAA LC-LC cord for MPT IDU_ODU connection300m pre-assembled fiber cable+ gland
3CC50097AAXX Cable overlength box (wall and pipe mounting only)
1AD161130001 Dynamometric wrench for Gland 20mm (10N)
1AD161030001 Dynamometric wrench for ODC
1AB383760001 Optical SFP - MPR/MPT
3CC50098AAXX MPR-MPT tool bag (special tools)
3CC50099AAXX Standard tool bag
3CC50107AAXX Power Extractor (it includes the two 2 m jumpers for connection to MPT-HC, the R2CT connector to terminate the MSS-Power Extractor cable and the grounding kit)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 231/308
4.2.7.4 Accessories and cables for MPT-MC connections
1AC016760006 IDU-ODU Ethernet cable Cat5e shield 80% for outdoor environment
1AB074610027 RJ45 connector (boot included)
1AD160490001 Tool for HIROSE RJ45 IDU-ODU cable assembling
1AB150990002 R2CT connector
1AF17000AAAA Hoisting protection tube (for ethernet or fiber cord)
1AD040130004 Grounding kit for RJ45 Ethernet electrical cable
3CC08166AAXX ODU Grounding kit
3CC50098AAXX MPR-MPT tool bag (special tools)
3CC50099AAXX Standard tool bag
4.2.7.5 Nose Adapter for MPT-HC and MPT-MC
3DB01460AAXX 6 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
3DB01459AAXX 7/8 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
3CC50125AAXX 11 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
1AB146090003 13 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
1AB146090001 15 GHz Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
1AB146090002 18/23/25 Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
3DB02082AAXX 28/38 Nose Adapter (for Not Integrated Antenna)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1232/308
4.2.7.6 Flextwists for MPT-HC and MPT-MC
1AF02951ABAA 6 GHz flextwist L = 1m (PDR-UDR)
1AF11977AAAA 7/8 GHz flextwist WR112 L = 1m (PDR84/UBR84)
3CC05751ACAA 11 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m
3CC05751ACAA 13 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m
3CC05750ACAA 15 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m
3CC05749ACAA 18/23/25 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m
3DB00682AAXX 28/38 GHz flextwist L = 0.6m
4.2.7.7 Ethernet Electrical Cables
3CC52141ABAA RJ45-RJ45 Eth. CAT5E shielded straight cable 5 m
3CC52141ACAA RJ45-RJ45 Eth. CAT5E shielded straight cable 15 m
4.2.7.8 Ethernet Optical Cables
The following multi-mode jumpers are available:
1AB214000016 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-LC L = 5m
1AB214000017 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-LC L = 10m
1AB240330033 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-FC L = 5m
1AB240330032 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-FC L = 10m
1AB200240003 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-SC L = 5m
1AB200240004 Fiber Simplex MM jumper LC-SC L = 10m
The following single-mode jumpers are available:
3CC52077AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to LC
3CC52078AAAA Fiber 5M SM LC to LC
3CC52079AAAA Fiber 10M SM LC to LC
3CC52080AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to FC
3CC52081AAAA Fiber 5M SM LC to FC
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 233/308
3CC52084AAAA Fiber 10M SM LC to FC
3CC52083AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to SC
3CC52085AAAA Fiber 5M SM LC to SC
3CC52086AAAA Fiber 10M SM LC to SC
3CC52087AAAA Fiber 3M SM LC to SC
3CC52088AAAA Fiber 5M, SM FC-SC
3CC52017AAAA Fiber 10M, SM FC-SC
3CC52023AAAA Fiber 3M, SM SC-SC
3CC52025AAAA Fiber 5M, SM SC-SC
3CC52029AAAA Fiber 10M, SM SC-SC
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1234/308
4.2.7.9 E1 Connectors on the front panel of the MSS-1c
Table 23. Pin Function: Tributaries 1- 8
Pin Name Dir Description Pin Name Dir Description
1 20
2 In+ E1-1 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal 21 In- E1-1 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal
3 In+ E1-2 Rx E1-2 Rx differential signal 22 In- E1-2 Rx E1-2 Rx differential signal
4 In+ E1-3 Rx E1-3 Rx differential signal 23 In- E1-3 Rx E1-3 Rx differential signal
5 In+ E1-4 Rx E1-4 Rx differential signal 24 In- E1-4 Rx E1-4 Rx differential signal
6 In+ E1-5 Rx E1-5 Rx differential signal 25 In- E1-5 Rx E1-5 Rx differential signal
7 In+ E1-6 Rx E1-6 Rx differential signal 26 In- E1-6 Rx E1-6 Rx differential signal
8 In+ E1-7 Rx E1-7 Rx differential signal 27 In- E1-7 Rx E1-7 Rx differential signal
9 In+ E1-8 Rx E1-8 Rx differential signal 28 In- E1-8 Rx E1-8 Rx differential signal
10 Ground 29
11 30 Out- E1-1 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal
12 Out+ E1-1 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal 31 Out- E1-2 Tx E1-2 Tx differential signal
13 Out+ E1-2 Tx E1-2 Tx differential signal 32 Out- E1-3 Tx E1-3 Tx differential signal
14 Out+ E1-3 Tx E1-3 Tx differential signal 33 Out- E1-4 Tx E1-4 Tx differential signal
15 Out+ E1-4 Tx E1-4 Tx differential signal 34 Out- E1-5 Tx E1-5 Tx differential signal
16 Out+ E1-5 Tx E1-5 Tx differential signal 35 Out- E1-6 Tx E1-6 Tx differential signal
17 Out+ E1-6 Tx E1-6 Tx differential signal 36 Out- E1-7 Tx E1-7 Tx differential signal
18 Out+ E1-7 Tx E1-7 Tx differential signal 37 Out- E1-8 Tx E1-8 Tx differential signal
19 Out+ E1-8 Tx E1-8 Tx differential signal
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 235/308
Table 24. Pin Function: Tributaries 9- 10
Pin Name Dir Description Pin Name Dir Description
1 20
2 In+ E1-9 Rx E1-1 Tx differential signal 21 In- E1-9 Rx E1-1 Rx differential signal
3 In+ E1-10 Rx E1-2 Tx differential signal 22 In- E1-10 Rx E1-2 Rx differential signal
4 23
5 24
6 25
7 26
8 27
9 28
10 Ground 29
11 30 Out- E1-9 Tx E1-1 Tx differential signal
12 Out+ E1-9 Tx E1-1 Rx differential signal 31 Out- E1-10 Tx E1-2 Tx differential signal
13 Out+ E1-10 Tx E1-2 Rx differential signal 32
14 33
15 34
16 35
17 36
18 37
19
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1236/308
4.2.8 Antenna Alignment
This section includes:
– Preparation (see par. 4.2.8.1 on page 237)
– Signal Measurement (see par. 4.2.8.2 on page 237)
– Aligning the Antenna (see par. 4.2.8.3 on page 240)
– Main Beams and Side Lobes (see par. 4.2.8.4 on page 244)
4.2.8.1 Preparation
Before aligning antennas ensure:
– The ODUs are powered up at both ends of the link.
– Transmit and receive frequencies are correctly set.
– Transmit powers are correctly set and transmit mute is turned off.
If frequency and/or power settings are not correct for the application, interference may be caused to other links in the same geographical area.
4.2.8.2 Signal Measurement
Two receive signal-strength indicators are provided to assist antenna alignment, RSL in the Performance screen, and the RSSI voltage at LEMO connector on the MPT-HC. Refer to:
– Using RSL Data (see par. 4.2.8.2.1 on page 237)
– Using the RSSI Voltage at the MPT-HC (see par. 4.2.8.2.2 on page 238)
– RSL Measurement Guidelines (see par. 4.2.8.2.2.1 on page 240)
4.2.8.2.1 Using RSL Data
As MCT is accessed via connection to the MSS, a separate means of communication such as two-way radio or cell phone is required between the MCT operator and the person at the antenna.
To align using RSL:
1) Monitor RSL in the MCT Performance screen.
2) Set antenna alignment for maximum RSL.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 237/308
3) Repeat for the far end of the link.
4) Compare actual RSLs with the expected RSLs from the link installation datapack. RSL mea-surement accuracies:
a) ± 2 dB for levels -40 to -70 dBm, over a temperature range of 0 to +35°C.
b) ±4 dB for levels -25 to -85 dBm, over an extended -33 to +55°C range.
4.2.8.2.2 Using the RSSI Voltage at the MPT-HC/MPT-MC
A voltmeter, such as a multimeter, is used to measure RSSI voltage.
Use the MPT/AWY Service Cord for the power monitoring in addition to a voltmeter.
1) Connect a voltmeter to the MPT-HC/MPT-MC through the MPT/AWY Service Cord.
2) Adjust antenna alignment until the voltage reading is at maximum value.
3) Repeat for the far end of the link.
Check and record the peak voltage at each end. The RSSI voltage provides a direct relationship with RSL, as follows:
Units Measurement (with MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
Service kit cable (Vdc) 5 4.71 4.12 3.5 2.9 2.3 1.71 1.11 0.59 0.14
RSL (dBm) -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100
4) Compare actual RSLs to the expected RSLs from the link installation datapack. Refer to par. 4.2.8.2.2.1 - RSL Measurement Guidelines.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1238/308
MPT/AWY Service Cord operative information
Figure 163. herebelow shows this optional cable (P/N 3CC52191AAXX):
LEMO wire 6 = ground
Connection table
Signal M1 M2 M3 M4
ETH_TXP_T 1 3
ETH_TXN_T 2 6
GND 3 X
ETH_RXP_T 4 1
ETH_RXN_T 5 2
PRX_OUT 12 X
Figure 163. MPT/AWY Service Cord
Connector usage:
– (M1) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on MPT-HC/MPT-MC.
– banana plugs (M3) and (M4): output is a 0 to +5V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. Duringequipment line–up, through a multi–meter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measuredvoltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field.
– (M2) RJ45 connector, to connect the MCT directly to the MPT.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 239/308
4.2.8.2.2.1 RSL Measurement Guidelines
RSSI/RSL Accuracy
When checking RSSI/RSL against the predicted link values ensure appropriate allowances are made for Tx power-setting accuracy, path-loss calculation accuracy, and RSSI/RSL measurement accuracy.
– For a worst-case the overall accuracy is the sum of the individual accuracy limits, which for a link would be ±4 dB of the predicted value (±2 dB for transmit, ±2 dB for receive, 0 to 35°C), aside from the path-loss calculation accuracy, which should be within limits of ±3 dB.
– Typically, where the measured RSSI/RSL is more than 4 dB lower than the expected receive level you should check the path survey results, path calculations and antenna alignment.
When checking RSSI/RSL ensure the measurement is made under normal, unfaded and interference-free path conditions.
– A discrepancy of 20 dB or greater between the measured and calculated RSSI/ RSLs suggests an antenna is aligned on a side lobe, or there is a polarization mismatch.
4.2.8.3 Aligning the Antenna
Antenna alignment involves adjusting the direction of each antenna until the received signal strength reaches its maximum level at each end of the link.Fine adjustment for azimuth (horizontal angle) and elevation (vertical angle) is built into each antenna mount.Adjustment procedures will be provided with each antenna.If the horizontal adjuster does not provide suf-ficient range to locate the main beam, the antenna mounting brackets will need to be loosened and the antenna swiveled on its pole mount to locate the beam.Before doing this ensure the horizontal adjuster is set for mid-travel.Some mounts for larger antennas have a separately clamped swivel base to allow the loosened antenna to swivel on it without fear of slippage down the pole. Where such a mount is not provided a temporary swivel clamp can often be provided using a pair of pipe brackets bolted together immediately below the antenna mount.
Ensure antennas are aligned on the main beam, and not a side lobe. For guidance, refer to the sections Locating the Main Beam (see par. 4.2.8.4.1 on page 244)
and Tracking Path Error (see par. 4.2.8.4.2 on page 245). Ensure ATPC is turned off during the alignment procedure.
Note
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1240/308
4.2.8.3.1 Standard Alignment Procedure
To align an antenna:
1) Loosen the azimuth adjuster on the antenna mount (horizontal angle) and adjust azimuth posi-tion for maximum signal strength.
2) Tighten the azimuth securing mechanism. Ensure signal strength does not drop as it is tight-ened.
3) Loosen the elevation adjuster (vertical angle) and adjust for maximum signal strength.
4) Tighten the elevation securing mechanism. Ensure signal strength does not drop as it is tight-ened. The terminal is now aligned and ready to carry operational traffic.
5) Record RSL and/or RSSI voltage in the commissioning log.
4.2.8.3.2 Alignment Procedure for Dual polarized Antenna
The following procedure details steps required to:
– Check and if necessary set feedhead alignment using a spirit level.
– Align the antennas at each end using just one of the feeds, H or V. (Standard co-plane antenna alignment).
– Check cross pole discrimination (XPD).
Optimize alignment of the feed-heads to achieve maximum cross polarization discrimination. This procedure assumes that the antennas used at each end of the link do comply with their
cross-polarization discrimination specification. If in doubt, refer to the antenna supplier.
Procedure:
[1] Static Feedhead Alignment
During antenna installation and before weatherproofing is installed, use a spirit level to check and set exact vertical / horizontal alignment of the feeds:
• Do not rely on antenna markings as these will not be accurate where a mount is not perfectly level.
• Set the spirit level against the flange of the feedhead. Take care that only the flange of the feed-head is measured, so that no error is introduced by any minor misalignment of the mating flex-ible waveguide flange. See Figure 164.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 241/308
Figure 164. Checking Feedhead Flange with a Spirit level
• If not exactly vertical or horizontal, adjust the feedhead skew angle (rotate the feedhead) until correct (spirit level bubble is precisely centered). For a typical feedhead check both flanges for level, using an end point half way between the level points of the two flanges should there be any discrepancy between the two.
[2] Align Antennas
Align the antennas at both ends using the standard (co-plane) alignment procedure, but using just one of the feeds, V or H. Refer to Standard Alignment Procedure (see par. 4.2.8.3.1 on page 241). When correct, proceed to step 3.
[3] Power-up both V and H links and check they are operating normally and are alarm-free. Use the Per-formance screens to check that:
• Tx power measurements are within 1 dB (typically). If not check Tx power settings.
• RSL measurements are within 2 dB. See Using RSL Data (see par. 4.2.8.2.1 on page 237) for guidance on measurement accuracy.
• Links are operating error-free.
Where there is potential for interference from other links in the same geographical area, check by turning the far end transmitter(s) off and measuring the local end RSL
on both V and H feeds.
[4] Measure the actual V and H signal discrimination from each antenna.
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1242/308
• Where measured XPDs are better than 25 dB no further adjustment is needed
• Where less than 25 dB proceed to the next step.
The alignment procedures listed under steps 1 and 2 should result in a discrimination of better than 25dB. However, for best results and greater operating margins during fading, feedhead alignment should be opti-
mized using the following procedure.
[5] Optimize End-End Feedhead Alignment
This procedure corrects for any minor rotational alignment between antennas at each end.
One antenna is the reference antenna and its feed-head assembly is not adjusted during this pro-cedure.
Only check/adjust skew angles on one antenna. If both antennas are adjusted and re-adjusted there is potential for progressive misalignment to occur. Select one antenna as the reference antenna. On long hops and where fading is prevalent there is potential for the V and H plane paths to be affected differently and to therefore exhibit variable cross-polarization discrimination. This alignment procedure must be con-
ducted during periods of known, stable path conditions.
[6] Adjust the feedhead skew angle of the antenna for maximum XPD on both V and H link. If the max-imums for each are at (slightly) different angles, adjust for a mid-point.
Ensure that as you adjust the skew angle, the physical antenna alignment does not shift, which would make it necessary to repeat step 2. Check that antenna mounting bolts and azimuth and elevation adjuster locks have been correctly tightened. The maximum points may be quite sharp, rotate the feedhead slowly
to ensure they are not missed.
[7] Check the XPD on the link at the reference end of the link, which should be within 1 to 2 dB of the measurements at the adjusted end.
[8] On completion ensure feedhead bolts are correctly tightened - check that XPDs do not change during tightening.
[9] Retain feed-head adjustment data for the commissioning records.
Note
Note
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 243/308
4.2.8.4 Main Beams and Side Lobes
This section describes how to locate the main beam, and typical tracking path errors.
4.2.8.4.1 Locating the Main Beam
Ensure the antennas are aligned on the main beam, and not a side lobe.
Once a measurable signal is observed, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main beam. For instance, a 1.2m antenna at 23 GHz typically has 0.9° of adjustment from center of main beam to the first null (0.4° to the -3 dB point). Antenna movement across the main beam will result in a rapid rise and fall of signal level. As a guide, 1 degree of beam width is equivalent to moving approximately 1.0 mm around a standard 114 mm (4.5 in.) diameter O/D pipe.
Antennas can be verified as being on main beam (as opposed to a side lobe) by comparing measured receive signal level with the calculated level.
Signal strength readings are usually measurable when at least a main beam at one end and first side lobes at the other are aligned.
The strongest signal occurs at the center of the main beam. The highest first lobe signal is typically 20 - 25 dB less than the main beam signal. When both antennas are aligned for maximum main beam signal strength, the receive signal level should be within 2 dB of the calculated level for the path. This calculated level should be included in the installation datapack for the link.
Figure 165. is an example of a head-on, conceptual view of the beam signal strength, with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main beam.
Figure 165. Indicative head-on signal pattern for a parabolic antenna
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1244/308
4.2.8.4.2 Tracking Path Error
Side lobe signal readings can be confused with main beam readings. This is particularly true for the first side lobe as the signal level at its center is greater than the signal level at the edges of the main beam, and if tracking on an incorrect elevation (or azimuth) a false impression of main beam reception can be obtained. This illustration shows an example of this with a simplified head-on view of an antenna radiation pattern, and tracking paths for three elevation settings.
Figure 166. Example Tracking Path Signals
Line AA represents the azimuth tracking path of a properly aligned antenna.The main beam is at point 2, and the first side lobes at points 1 and 3. Line BB represents the azimuth tracking path with the antenna tilted down slightly. Signal strength readings show only the first side lobe peaks, 4 and 5. In some instances the side lobe peaks are unequal due to antenna characteristics, which can lead to the larger peak being mistaken for the main beam. The correct method for locating the main beam in this case is to set the azimuth position midway between the first side lobe peaks, and then adjust the elevation for maximum signal.
Line CC represents an azimuth tracking path with the antenna tilted down further still. The first side lobe signal peaks (6 and 7) appear as one peak, leading to a mistaken interpretation of a main beam. The correct method for locating the main beam is to set the azimuth at mid peak, between 6 and 7, and then adjust elevation for maximum signal.
This first side lobe peaking is probably the most frequent cause of misalignment in both azimuth and elevation, especially so if one side lobe peaks higher than the other, as shown in Figure 167. A common error is to move the antenna left to right along line DD, or top to bottom along line EE, always ending up with the maximum signal at position 1.
Figure 167. Example Tracking Path Signals on the First Side Lobe
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 245/308
4.3 Software local copy
This section explains how to prepare the WebEML Suite and Craft Terminal environment in your PC.
– Getting Started (par. 4.3.1 on page 247)
– PC Characteristics (par. 4.3.2 on page 247)
– Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC (par. 4.3.3 on page 248)
– Local copy the WebEML to PC (par. 4.3.4 on page 250)
– Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE (par. 4.3.5 on page 256)
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1246/308
4.3.1 Getting Started
Read the following before starting.
– The operator must be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWS environment, internally from which the NE application software operates.
– WebEML Suite and MCT applications are on one CD. Software Package (SWP) is on another CD. Verify versions of the CD-ROM.
– To properly install WebEML Suite and MCT applications, a PC is required, having the characteristics specified in paragraph 4.3.2.
4.3.2 PC Characteristics
The PC to use for WebEML Suite and MCT applications must meet following characteristics:
PC Hardware Configuration:
– CPU: AMD Atlhon/Intel Celeron/Intel Pentium 4 or higher
– RAM: 1 GB
– Hard Disk space: 1.5 GB (available space for log files, JRE excluded)
– Display Resolution: 1280x800 pixel
– DVD-ROM Drive (needed for the TCO Suite)
– Ethernet Interface: Ethernet Card 10/100 Mbps
Operating Systems Supported:
– Microsoft Windows XP Professional service pack 3 or Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate service pack 2 or Windows 7
N.B. "Classic windows" setting must be choosen with Windows Vista and Windows 7.
Additional requirements:
– Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1, 7, 8, Mozilla Firefox 2, 3, 3.5
– The Administrator password is needed only for Java installation.
– When Java has been installed, the standard user can run the WebEML Suite
– Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 6 Update 14
An FTP Server must be installed on the PC of MCT user with read right & write right, and the Windows Firewall must be desactivated.
Note
Warning
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 247/308
4.3.3 Local copy of the Software Package (SWP) to the PC
Follow these steps to copy the Software Package (SWP) to the PC.
[1] Insert the SWP CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The Software Package will auto-run and open up the computer's default browser program (if auto-run fea-ture is enabled on user's PC) as soon as the CD-ROM is read by the PC. If auto-run does not start, the user must run (double-click with left mouse button on it) the aluopener.exe file, available on CD-ROM root,
in order to launch the Software Package.
This certificate is not signed by a public/trusted certification authority. The Warning Security dialog will inform the user about this problem and browser/JRE will probably recognize the signature as "not valid". This is neither an error nor a problem. If the dialog message specifies that the signature cannot be ver-ified, it means the signed applet is correct but that the signature cannot be publicly checked on the Internet. As usual, both language and graphical layout could vary with respect to browser, operating system ver-sion, operating system and browser languages and so on. To avoid further requests it is suggested to con-
firm and "always trust" the stated certificate source.
[2] Click on the Local Copy button to copy the software to your local PC.
[3] Click on the Start Copying button.
Note
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1248/308
[4] Choose a directory location for the Local Copy of Software Package. Select the directory and click on OK to begin the copy process.
Warning: Special characters (like #...) cannot be used.
[5] The files will be copied from the CD to the PC and will create a directory named ECT.
[6] A successful copy message will display, when all files have been copied. Click OK.
[7] Remove the SWP CD from the CD-ROM drive.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 249/308
4.3.4 Local copy the WebEML to PC
Follow these steps to copy the WebEML software to the PC.
[1] Insert the TCO Software Suite DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
The TCO Software Suite will auto-run and open up the computer's default browser program (if auto-run feature is enabled on user's PC) as soon as the DVD-ROM is read by the PC. If auto-run does not start, user must run (double-click with left mouse button on it) the Start.exe file, available on DVD-ROM root, in order to launch the Software Package.
This certificate is not signed by a public/trusted certification authority. The Warning Security dialog will inform the user about this problem and browser/JRE will probably recognize the signature as "not valid". This is neither an error nor a problem. If the dialog message specifies that the signature cannot be verified, it means the signed applet is correct, but that the signature cannot be publicly checked on the Internet. As usual, both language and graphical layout could vary with respect to browser, operating system version, operating system and browser languages and so on. To avoid further requests it is suggested to confirm and "always trust" the stated certificate source.
[2] The following screen opens.
[3] Double click on MSS-1c icon to perform the Local Copy of the WebEML.
Note
Note
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1250/308
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 251/308
[4] Click No.
[5] Click Yes to perform the WebEML Local Copy.
[6] Select the directory and click Open.
Warning: Special characters (like #...) cannot be used.
[7] The copy is now in progress.
[8] Wait until the following message will appear. Click OK.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1252/308
[9] Click Yes to set a link on the desktop.
[10] Double click on the WebEML icon on the desktop to start the application.
N.B. An alternative way to perform the Local Copy of the WebEML is the following:
[1] Click on the Advanced Settings button below.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 253/308
[2] Select one of the two Advanced Settings options to copy software to the PC.
• Java JRE Package Installation (par. 4.3.4.1 on page 254)
• Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT) (par. 4.3.4.2 on page 254)
4.3.4.1 Java JRE Package Installation
[1] Click on the Java JRE Package Installation button to install the Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 6 Update 14 version to your PC.
4.3.4.2 Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT)
[1] Click on the Local Copy of WebEML (JUSM/CT) button to copy the WebEML software to your PC. Choose the directory location and click Open and then OK.
Warning: Special characters (like #...) cannot be used.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1254/308
[2] When the files have finished copying, this window will display. Click the OK button.
[3] Click Yes to set a link on the desktop.
[4] An icon will be created on the desktop.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 255/308
4.3.5 Configure PC Network Card to Connect to NE
This example uses a Microsoft Windows XP Professional system.
[1] Connect a CAT 5/5E cable from the PC network card to MCT connector on MSS-1c.
[2] Click on the START menu on the Windows desktop and open up the CONTROL PANEL.
[3] Open up the NETWORK CONNECTIONS. Highlight the network card as shown below.
[4] Dobule click on Properties to display the screen below and scroll down the list to highlight the Inter-net Protocol (TCP/IP) line. Click the OK button.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1256/308
[5] The DHCP server on the equipment is enabled as default. Set the PC “Obtain an IP address auto-matically”.
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 257/308
User Manual
Installation
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1258/308
5 ProvisioningThis chapter describes the first installation procedure to configure the NE.
Procedure:
[1] Set up the interconnections as shown in Figure 94. for MPT-MC and in Figure 95.-Figure 96. for MPT-HC.
[2] Verify on the PC, that the MCT application has been installed (if not, refer to paragraph 4.3.4.2 to install it)
[3] Configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.252).
[4] Connect the PC Ethernet port to the CT Port connector of the MSS-1c.
Figure 168. PC connection
[5] Launch directly the MCT by double clicking on file Mct.exe, located under the path created by the operator during the local copy and under "\\WebEML MPR TCO R4.2\9500MCT_V01.00.00\Mct".
Note: To be sure that MPT SWP version is >= MPR 2.2 and supports the MSS-1c configuration, it is recommended to launch the MCT application directly. The check is done automatically by the application and authorizes only SW download feature is case of misalignment.
User Manual
Provisioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 259/308
[6] Select Online and click on Next.
[7] Enter the User Name (admin) and the Password (admin) and click on Finish.
[8] If the embedded SWP is not aligned on MPR2.2 this message appears.
Only the upgrade NE functionality is available.
Note: If the software is aligned on MPR2.2, then MCT application runs as described in chapter 3 (NE management).
User Manual
Provisioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1260/308
[9] Configure the FTP server parameters.
Select the descriptor file in : //ECT/SWDW/R95MSS1C/1_0_0/R951C.DSC
[10] Start Software Download.
[11] Activate the Standby Software Package.
[12] MPT resets and the connection with MCT is lost.
[13] The NE is now ready.
[14] Configure by the MCT all the parameters in menu Commissioning > Configuration (refer to para-graph 3.6.1.3).
User Manual
Provisioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 261/308
User Manual
Provisioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1262/308
6 Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
6.1 Introduction
This section contains information and procedures to aid in restoring the equipment to its proper operating condition after it has been determined that a problem exists.
The following warnings and cautions apply while operating, performance testing, troubleshooting, or repairing the 9500 MPR-E series radios.
Short circuits in low-voltage, low-impedance dc circuits can cause severe arcing that may result in burns or eye injury. Remove rings,
watches, and other metal jewelry while working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
Units with the electrostatic-sensitive (ESS) symbol contain ESS devices. Store these units in an antistatic container when not in use, and anyone handling a unit should observe antistatic precautions.
Refer to the Special Precautions pages in the front of the instruction book for detailed handling information.
Ensure that all antennas are properly aligned and waveguide is in good physical condition.
Before performing procedures that might in any way affect transmission, it is recommended that the person performing the procedure
understand the Rules and Regulations pertaining to the equipment and be properly authorized to operate the equipment.
Note
Note
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 263/308
6.2 Maintenance Philosophy
This section provides information and procedures for equipment maintenance down to the Card level. Card repair is not covered in this manual.
The use of maintenance procedures in this section may result from failure of a periodic check, an alarm indication, or unacceptable performance.
6.3 Personal Computer (PC)/Laptop
Connect the RJ45 Interface cable between Craft Terminal connector on the Core-E Card and the PC.
6.4 Troubleshooting
This section provides guidance on:
– Before Going to Site Checklist
– Troubleshooting Basics
– Troubleshooting Path Problems
– Troubleshooting Configuration Problems
– Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems
– Troubleshooting TMN Problems
6.4.1 Before Going to Site Checklist
Where possible, before going to site obtain the following information:
– Does the fault require immediate attention?
– Determine who is the best-placed person to attend the fault.
– Confirm the nature and severity of the reported fault, its location, 9500 MPR-E type, frequency band, high/low end ODU, capacity modulation and configuration (nonprotected, protected, diversity). Ask:
• Is just one 9500 MPR-E link affected, or a number of links in the same geographical area?
• Is the path down completely or is traffic passing but with a BER alarm?
• Is only one or a number of tributaries affected?
• Could the fault be in the equipment connected to 9500 MPR-E, rather than in 9500 MPR-E? Are there alarms on other, connected equipment?
• Is it a hard or intermittent fault?
• Do alarms confirm which end of an alarmed link is faulty?
– Could the weather (rain, ice, high wind, temperature) be a factor in the reported fault?
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1264/308
If the fault suggests a rain fade or other weather related fade condition and it matches the prevailing weather conditions, do
not take any action until the weather abates.
– Does link history suggest any fault trends?
• Does the fault history for the link indicate a likely cause?
• Is the 9500 MPR-E link newly installed?
• Has there been any recent work done on the link?
– Ensure that you have with you:
• Appropriate spares. Where an equipment failure is suspected, these should include replace-ment MSS-1c and ODU. If an ODU is suspected then local/national climbing safety require-ments must be adhered to.
• A laptop PC loaded with Craft Terminal, and an Ethernet cable. If an Ethernet connection is to be used, you need the IP address and also the addresses for any remote sites to be accessed.
• If login security has been enabled, you need the ‘engineer’ password for the local and also any remote sites to be accessed.
• Any special test equipment that may be needed, such as a BER tester.
• Toolkit.
• Key(s) for access to the site.
6.4.2 PC Troubleshooting
In case of the NE is not displayed in the NETO screen, the MCT has to be launched directly through Mct.exe located under the path created by the operator during the local copy and under \\WebEML MPR TCO R4.2\9500MCT_V01.00.00\Mct.
6.4.3 Troubleshooting Basics
This section provides general guidance on 9500 MPR-E troubleshooting:
– Check front-panel LED indications. These provide summary alarm indications, which can help narrow down the location and type of failure. Refer to Operation section for details.
• Where a Status LED on a plug-in is off (unlit), but power to the MS is confirmed by LEDs on other plug-ins, check the seating of the affected plug-in.
– Check the MCT Screen. When logging to the equipment with Craft Terminal, the opening screen is the Main Screen. Use the information provided in menu Alarms and in menu Events to check for severity and problem type. Refer to Table 25., Table 26. and Table 27. for probable cause and recommended action.
Note
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 265/308
Table 25.
Equipment Alarm Description Configuration 1 + 0Alarm Severity
Most Probable Cause
Action
MSS-1c Card Fail Major MSS-1c card fail Replace the MSS-1c
SFP missing alarm Major The SFP optional plug-in is provi-sioned, but not present
Install the plug-in in the SFP slot
SFP Tx fault (for optical only)
Major Failure in the opti-cal transmitter
Replace the SFP
LOS on GigabitETH Interface
Major Loss of Ethernet is detected
Check link partner and cable between link partner and ETH connector
MSS-1c(E1 section)
LOS on PDH Tributary
Major No E1 input signal detected on any one or more of 10 lines
Check E1 source and/or cable
AIS on PDH Tribu-tary (RX)
Major AIS detected by the receive circuits on one or more E1 lines, indicating upstream failure
Check for upstream E1 source for errors
AIS on PDH Tribu-tary (TX)
Major AIS detected on one or more E1 lines at input to PDH 10xE1
Check E1 source
Loss of CESoETH Frame
Major Packets are not being received by the emulation cir-cuits
Check/Trouble-shoot far end alarms
Fans Unit Card Fail Major Fan failed Replace fan unit
MSS-1c and Fans Alarm Matrix
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1266/308
Table 26. MPT-HC Alarm Matrix
Equipment Alarm Description Config-uration/Alarm
Most Probable Cause Action
1+0
MPT-HC Card Fail Major MPT-HC failed Replace MPT-HC
Loss of Radio Frame
Major Far end problems, RF path problems, or local circuit fail-ures have caused BER to increase to the point that frames are being lost
1. Check/troubleshoot far end alarms 2. Replace alarmed MPT-HC
Demod Function Fail Major Internal receive circuit failure Replace MPT-HC
High BER Major Bit Error Rate threshold (10E-4) exceeded
1. Verify RF path is clear, antenna is aligned, and no existing weather- related problems 2. Verify RSL is above RCV threshold. If not – check upstream transmitter output/troubleshoot transmitter
Early Warning Minor 10E-9 BER detected No action is required at this time. Monitor receive signal for increased degrading
Link Identifier Mismatch
Major Link identifier number provi-sioned is different from link identifier number provi-sioned at other end of hop
Set numbers at both ends of hop to match
MPT Loop Communication alarm
Minor Communication problem between the local MPT and the remote MPT for all the functionalities requiring a communication loop (ATPC, ACM, Pre-distorsion)
Check the radio hop
Sync Degraded signal
Minor This alarm can raise if the addressed Radio interface has been configured as pri-mary/secondary synchroni-zation source. It is active if the frequency of the clock recovered from radio Rx sig-nal is mistuned
Check the radio hop
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 267/308
TCA on Radio Hop Major Alarm threshold exceeded on standby MPT-HC after switching from main to standby
UAT on Radio Hop Major 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on standby MPT-HC after switching from admin to standby
Equipment Alarm Description Config-uration/Alarm
Most Probable Cause Action
1+0
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1268/308
Table 27. MPT-MC Alarm Matrix
Equipment Alarm Description Config-uration/Alarm
Most Probable Cause Action
1+0
MPT-MC Card Fail Major MPT-MC failed Replace MPT-MC
Loss of Radio Frame
Major Far end problems, RF path problems, or local circuit fail-ures have caused BER to increase to the point that frames are being lost
1. Check/troubleshoot far end alarms 2. Replace alarmed MPT-MC
Demod Function Fail
Major Internal receive circuit failure
Replace MPT-MC
High BER Major Bit Error Rate threshold (10E-4) exceeded
1. Verify RF path is clear, antenna is aligned, and no existing weather- related problems 2. Verify RSL is above RCV threshold. If not – check upstream transmitter output/troubleshoot transmitter
Early Warning Minor 10E-9 BER detected No action is required at this time. Monitor receive signal for increased degrading
Link Identifier Mismatch
Major Link identifier number provi-sioned is different from link identifier number provi-sioned at other end of hop
Set numbers at both ends of hop to match
MPT Loop Commu-nication alarm
Minor Communication problem between the local MPT and the remote MPT for all the functionalities requiring a communication loop (ATPC, ACM, Pre-distorsion)
Check the radio hop
Sync Degraded signal
Minor This alarm can raise if the addressed Radio interface has been configured as pri-mary/secondary synchroni-zation source. It is active if the frequency of the clock recovered from radio Rx sig-nal is mistuned
Check the radio hop
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 269/308
EPS – Equipment Protection Switching
LOS – Loss of Signal
RPS – Radio Protection Switching
RCV – Receiver
TCA – Threshold Crossing Alarm
UAT – Un-Available Time
– Check the basics first.
• For example, if multiple alarms are present, and these include power supply voltage or hard-ware alarms, always check their cause before looking at resultant down-stream path failure or path warning (signal) alarms.
• Similarly, if a path-related failure is indicated (no hardware or software alarms), investigate the path. Go to the Craft Terminal History screen (15 minute view) to check supporting data, such as low RSL and incidence of intermittent pre-failure BER alarms, which if present are evidence of a path-related failure.
– Check if symptoms match the alarm. Alarms reflect the alarm state, but in exceptional circumstances an alarm may be raised because of a failure to communicate correctly with the alarm source, or a failure in alarm management processing. Always check to see if symptoms match the alarm, using LED indications and the Craft Terminal.
– Check if recent work may be a cause. Recent work at the site may be a cause or contributing factor. Check for a configuration change, software upgrade, power recycling (reboot), or other site work:
• Many hardware alarms are only initiated as a loss-of-communications alarm during a reboot, software upgrade, or reconfiguration. By not being able to communicate with the MSS-1c, their settings cannot be loaded. The fault may be at the hardware device (most likely), or commu-nications to it.
– MSS before an ODU. If there is doubt about whether a fault is in the MSS or ODU, always replace the MSS first; it is quicker and easier.
TCA on Radio Hop Major Alarm threshold exceeded on standby MPT-MC after switching from main to standby
UAT on Radio Hop Major 10 consecutive SES (unavailable time period) detected on standby MPT-MC after switching from admin to standby
Equipment Alarm Description Config-uration/Alarm
Most Probable Cause Action
1+0
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1270/308
6.4.4 Troubleshooting with MSS-1c electrical or optical connection
In case of electrical connection with MPT (PFoE), there must be NO optical SFP plugged in MPT cage port (even if no fiber connected).
In case of moving from optical to electrical connection with MPT, the MSS-1c has to be switched off/on AFTER having unplugged the optical SFP on MPT port.
In case of moving from electrical to optical connection with MPT, the MSS-1c has to be switched off/on AFTER having plug the optical SFP on MPT port.
6.4.5 Troubleshooting Path Problems
A path-related problem, with the exception of interference, is characterized by traffic being similarly affected in both directions. Generally, if you are experiencing only a one-way problem, it is not a path problem.
A path extends from ODU antenna port to ODU antenna port.
– Normally a path problem is signalled by a reduced RSL, and depending on its severity, a high BER.
– Only in worst case situations, such as an antenna knocked out of alignment, will a path fail completely, and stay that way.
– For weather-related problems, such as rain or ducting, the path problem will disappear as the weather returns to normal.
6.4.5.1 Path Problems on a Commissioned Link
A path problem on an existing link, one that has been operating satisfactorily may be caused by:
– Weather-related path degradation
If BER alarms are fleeting/not permanent and RSL returns to its normal, commissioned level after the alarm is cleared, rain, diffraction, or multipath fading is indicated. Rain fade is the likely cause of fade for links 13 GHz and higher. Diffraction and multipath/ducting for links 11 GHz and lower. If these alarms are persistent, there could be a problem with the link design or original installation.
– Changed antenna alignment or antenna feed problem
If RSLs do not return to commissioned levels after a period of exceptionally strong winds, suspect antenna alignment. Also, check the antenna for physical damage, such as may occur with ice-fall. For a remote-mounted ODU, check its antenna feeder.
– New path obstruction
Where all other parameters check as normal, and the path has potential for it to be obstructed by construction works, view/survey the path for possible new obstructions.
Note
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 271/308
– Interference from other signal sources
Interference usually affects traffic in just one direction. Unlike other path problems, RSL is not affected. If suspected, check for new link installations at, or in the same geographical area, as the affected site. Ultimately, a spectrum analyzer may have to be used to confirm interference, which is not an easy task given the need to connect directly to the antenna port, after removing the ODU.
6.4.5.2 Path Problems on a New Link
For a new link, potential problems can extend to also include:
– Incorrect antenna alignment
One or both antennas incorrectly aligned. Refer to Installation alignment procedure on CD.
– Mismatching antenna polarizations
Given a typical polarization discrimination of 30 dB, for most links it is not possible to capture a signal to begin the antenna alignment process.
– Incorrect path calculations
If the RSLs are too low or too high, antenna alignment is correct, and Tx power settings are correct, check the path calculations used to determine the link performance. A good calculation match is +/- 2 dB. Disagreements in excess of 3 dB should be investigated.
– Reflections
Reflection (path cancellation) problems may not have been picked up at the path planning stage, par-ticularly if the survey was a simple line-of-sight. If suspected, resurvey the path.
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1272/308
6.4.6 Troubleshooting Configuration Problems
Configuration problems should only occur during the setup of a new link, or reconfiguration of an existing link. The more common problems may be broadly categorized as:
– Incorrect circuit connections
No alarms are activated for incorrect circuit connections. An incorrect assignment means the expected end-to-end circuit connectivity will not happen. Re-check circuit assignments for all nodes carrying the lost circuit(s).Take extra care when configuring ring circuits.
– Incorrect ID naming and commissioning
All traffic-carrying circuits must have a unique flow ID for the cross-connect capability to operate.
– Incorrect/incompatible trib settings
Trib line interface settings incorrect, or line levels incompatible. While no alarm activates for an incor-rect setting, its effect may result in line levels being too low (LOS alarm), or too high, resulting in a high BER.
6.4.7 Troubleshooting Ethernet Problems
This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting problems related to the four Ethernet ports on the MSS-1c.
The most common Ethernet problems are network and connectivity related and therefore always check the following first:
– for User and NMS ports, verify link partner capability, provisioning, and connection
– for Radio ports, verify the cabling between MPT and MSS-1c
In order for the green Link LED to light:
1) Cable must be connected to Ethernet port
2) Ethernet port must be enabled (provisioned Enabled). Applicable for User and NMS ports
3) Speed and mode must be provisioned the same as the link partner.
The yellow LED opposite the green on the connector indicates activity only. The flashing yellow LED is not an indicator of signal type or quality.
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 273/308
6.4.8 Troubleshooting TMN Problems
This section gives general guidance on troubleshooting TMN problems related to NMS Ethernet ports 1 and 2 on the MSS-1c.
The most common TMN problems are network related and first alert is normally observed by improper operation at the SNMP master. Always check the following first:
– Verify master is properly registered in NE to receive traps.
– Verify SNMP version matches system requirements
– Verify correct community string and privileges
– Verify proper network routing.
Refer to Table 28. for detail TMN network troubleshooting.
Table 28. TMN Network Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution
Unusually slow communication in radio network
1. Normal network management traffic is saturating the communi-cations channel.
1. There may be too many radios being managed within a single region. Split the radio network management into different regions and backhaul the traffic for each region through separate channels.
2. Polling radios for PM data or missed alarms too rapidly
2. Poll the radios more slowly.
3. Multiple remote software downloads in process
3. Download to fewer radios at a time.
4. IP traffic other than network management traffic being routed through radio network
4. Configure external routers to allow only network management related traffic through the Man-agement network of the radios. Dynamic route updates (OSPF) may attempt to reroute high speed traffic through the TMN network if a high speed ink fails.
Unable to operate controls using SNMP
To perform control operations, the Manager must be registered as a craft device.
Register the Manager as a craft device. Manager registration type can be changed as needed to type ‘ct’ to allow control operation and then be changed back to ‘nml’ for normal operation.
Can Read SNMP objects but can-not Write to SNMP objects
1. Incorrect community string 1. Use the correct community string.
2. If the TMN Interface is config-ured for SNMPv2, the write com-munity string is probably wrong.
2. Use the correct write commu-nity string.
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1274/308
No traps being received from NE 1. Manager not registered in NE to receive traps
1. Register Manager with NE.
2. Communication failure in net-work
2. Check network connectivity. Check redundant network paths and routing. Traceroute (tracert) is useful for locating path or rout-ing faults.
Unable to communicate with the NE through the radio network (unable to ‘ping’ the NE).
Possible communication path failure or routing failure within the radio network.
Use traceroute (tracert) to help locate for communication path or routing problems.
Can ‘ping’ the TMN Interface but cannot communicate with the NE using SNMP, or can only see a few SNMP objects in the NE.
If using SNMPv2, using the wrong community string.
Verify community string or user-name/passphrase.
Can “ping” the TMN interface, but cannot open the MCT
Another MCT session is already open on another machine
Close the other MCT session
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 275/308
6.5 Failed equipment removal and replacement
Never install, change or remove an unit without first connecting to the shelf with an ESD grounding cable. Failure to do so may
cause ESD damage to the cards.
6.5.1 MSS-1c removal and replacement
Turn off the power supply, disconnect all the cables and connect them to the spare MSS-1c and turn on the power supply.
6.5.2 MPT-HC removal and replacement
Disconnect the cables and the co-box from the MPT-HC to be replaced and connect them to the spare MPT-HC.
Reconfigure the MPT by using the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration) or if a backup file is available, restore the MPT configuration by the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration > Backup/Restore).
Connect the WebEML to the CT port of MSS-1c and configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and sub-net mask 255.255.255.252).
6.5.3 MPT-MC removal and replacement
Disconnect the cables and connect them to the spare MPT-MC.
Reconfigure the MPT by using the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration) or if a backup file is available, restore the MPT configuration by the WebEML (menu Commissioning > Configuration > Backup/Restore).
Connect the WebEML to the CT port of MSS-1c and configure the PC to “Get automatically an IP address” (because the NE is configured as DHCP Server with default IP address 192.168.30.1 and sub-net mask 255.255.255.252).
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1276/308
6.6 Cleaning
Do not use acid, alcohol, or brushes to clean the equipment because damage to the silkscreen labeling and antistatic coating can
result. Cleaning should be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using a damp cloth.
Cleaning should normally be confined to the removal of dust and dirt using a soft bristled (natural fiber) brush and a low velocity blower (such as a vacuum cleaner with a plastic blower nozzle). Do not use acid or synthetic bristled brushes to clean cards that contain electrostatic-sensitive components.
Note
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 277/308
User Manual
Maintenance and Trouble-clearing
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1278/308
7 Line–up and CommissioningThis chapter details all phases necessary for the equipment line–up and commissioning.
Subject On page
Introduction 280
General 280
Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and Cautions to avoid equipment damage 281
Conventions 281
Summary of the commissioning phases 282
Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up) 284
Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up) 285
Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B 285
End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A 287
Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test) 288
Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test) 299
Final operations 299
Annex A: fine antenna alignment 299
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 279/308
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 General
This chapter details all phases necessary for the equipment line–up, commissioning, and acceptance, providing the user with the information needed to connect, power on, and perform a minimum turn–up of a radio link comprising two MSS-1c Network Elements.
N.B. If the radio link consists of one MSS-1c in one station and one MSS-4/MSS-8 in the other sta-tion, for the commissioning of the station with the MSS-4/MSS-8 refer to the relevant User Man-ual.
It is assumed that, at both premises (Station A and Station B), the mechanical installation and cabling of the INDOOR and OUTDOOR units is completed, the antennas are installed and pre–positioned, and the MSS-1c–ODU cable(s) has/have been connected to the MSS-1c.
Any information needed to complete the above mentioned operations are out of the scope of this chapter.
For this purpose refer to the Installation section.
All the cables and measurement kits as described in Table 29. below are supposed to be available.
Table 29. Test and commissioning instruments
INSTRUMENT QTY CHARACTERISTICS
Laptop computer running the NE software
1 MCT
PDH Analyzer – Pattern Generator 1 E1 traffic
Link Service kit cable (for MPT antenna alignment)
1
In alternative, for Ethernet Datachannel functionality tests:
– 1 PC + 1 Ethernet cable (for ping function)
or
– 2 PCs (for ping function)or
– 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers
Optional
Multi–meter 1 Voltmeter AC and DC – Loop tester
TRS 1 Test Result Sheet, available as separate document
The Alcatel–Lucent Software package V2.2.0 must have already been installed in the PC used as the Craft Terminal (CT) and the same software version must be already present as commit version in the two Net-work Elements.
N.B. In the PC must be installed the FTP server.
Before proceeding with line–up and commissioning, ensure that you have the equipment and accessories required for that purpose.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1280/308
7.1.2 Safety–EMC–EMF–ESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage
If not yet done, read whole Chapter 1 on page 19: it describes the operations and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases, and to guarantee equipment safety. Read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipment.
7.1.3 Conventions
To simplify the description of actions, the following symbols are in use:
Symbol used Meaning
Manual action
Check/Verify
CT⇒ On Craft Terminal Select
⇒ Select a Menu item
→ Sub Menu item
The commissioning operations described in this document are for a radio link between a Station A and a Station B.
If the network includes supervision, station A is the one located between the supervisory station and sta-tion B (see figure below). Installation and commissioning begin at station A.
MSS MSS
Figure 169. Relative positions of stations A and B
WARNING: at the beginning of this procedure, the “local IP address” and “Ethernet IP address” of both the NE 9500 MPR-E stations, are still set to default value (as delivered from Alcatel–Lucent factory). For this reason, their physical connection to the TMN network must be done after having changed such addresses to correct values.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 281/308
7.1.4 Summary of the line–up, commissioning, and acceptance phases
The commissioning procedure is summarized as follows:
[1] Turn up (phase 1)
1) Visual inspection and NE configuration.
a) Station A, roughly point the antenna towards station B (if not done in the Hardware Instal-lation procedure)
b) Commission station A (phase 1)
c) Commission station B (phase 1)
2) Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B
a) Station B, fine align the antenna towards station A, and preliminary checks
b) Station A, fine align the antenna towards station B, and preliminary checks
[2] Site acceptance tests (phase 2)
3) Station A, perform all the commissioning checks and tests – Report the results in the TRS.MSS-1c
4) Station B, perform all the commissioning checks and tests – Report the results in the TRS.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1282/308
7.1.5 How to access the remote NE
Configuration example of NE in STATION A
- NE Local IP address: 172.168.60.1- NE NMS1 IP address: 192.168.50.2
Configuration example of NE in STATION B
- NE Local IP address: 172.168.70.1
The PC, as shown in Figure, is connected to the equipment in Station A and with the MCT we have to access also the equipment in Station B.
How to configure the PC
– Assign to the PC an IP address in the same sub-net as the NMS1 interface.– Configure a static route with this command: "route add 0.0.0.0 mask 0.0.0.0 192.168.50.2" (IP
address of the NMS1 working as Gateway).– Or in the IP configuration of the Ethernet Interface set the Default Gateway to 192.168.50.2 (NE A
NMS1 IP address).
How to configure the MPT in Station A
– Enable the "TMN RF Access" in menu Configuration > Networking > Network interfaces.
How to configure the MPT in Station B
– Enable the "TMN RF Access" in menu Configuration > Networking > Network interfaces.– Add the Static route "Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Link on radio side" in menu Configuration > Net-
working > Static Routing.– Or Add a static route to Network 192.168.50.0 255.255.255.0 Link on radio side.– Or Add a static route to Host 192.168.50.x (PC IP address) 255.255.255.255 Link on radio side.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 283/308
7.2 Commissioning of STATION A – phase 1 (Turn up)
– Where necessary, switch OFF the power supply before disconnecting the earth connection,
– Do not connect instruments directly to the MSS-1c/ODU cable connector since the con-nector carries DC voltage used to supply the ODU.
– Do not connect the IF cable between MSS-1c and ODU while the MSS-1c is powered up.
7.2.1 Turn–on preliminary operations
ALL THESE OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED WITH THE POWER OFF
The antenna of station A (or B) is pointed towards station B (or A) the best as possible (use compass if necessary).
The hardware configuration of the equipment corresponds to the expected one.
Make visual inspection for units’ installation and cabling:
• The MSS-1c subrack allocation according to the station lay–out
• The MSS-1c subrack and units ground connections
• The power supply voltage is present with the correct polarity at the MSS-1c power supply input
• Tributaries are cabled on the station DDF
• The MSS-1c–ODU cables ground kit connections
• The ODU(s) ground connections (In the case of a non–integrated antenna, the antenna and the ODU(s) must be ground connected)
• The MSS-1c(s) / ODU(s) cables are connected to MSS-1c(s) and ODU(s)
• The ODU(s) cables connectors waterproofing.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1284/308
7.2.2 Powering up the MSS-1c(s) with ODU(s) connected
This operation has the following scopes:
– verify the SWP present both in MCT and NE
– make the Central Frequency and Shifter values of ODUs be acquired by MSS-1c (so that they are retained in the NE’s data base).
Proceed as follows:
a) Switch on the MSS-1c by using the circuit breakers
b) Connect locally the MCT to the MSS-1c of the local station and perform the NE login.
1) Make a local connection through the Ethernet cable, between the Ethernet port of the PC and the NMS interface on the MSS-1c
2) Power on the PC and wait for its start–up
3) Start–up the MCT and wait for the welcome screen
4) Insert the “local IP address”
5) Start supervision on the local Network Element
c) Configure the NE as explained in the Provisioning chapter.
7.3 Commissioning of STATION B – phase 1 (Turn up)
– To commission Station B, perform (at Station B premises) the same operations carried on at Station A–Phase 1.
For near future tests, establish, on the DDF of Station B, hardware loops on every tributary.
7.4 Fine antenna alignment and preliminary checks – Stations A & B
7.4.1 Fine antenna alignment
When Station A and Station B are fully configured and operational, and assuming that the antenna insta-tion A (or B) has been previously correctly pointed toward the antenna in station B (or A), you should receive some field from station B (or A).
Note 1: Verify that the ATPC is disabled.
Now, proceed to a fine tuning of the antenna to improve as much as possible the received level, in both-Station A (at Station A premises) and Station B (at Station B premises). To perform the fine antenna align-ment refer to Annex A: fine antenna alignment on page 299.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 285/308
7.4.2 Preliminary checks
At first on Station A (at Station A premises), then on Station B (at Station B premises), log in the NE and-perform following checks by MCT:
Subject On page
Verify ODU(s) alarm status 286
Transmitter power output check 286
Received power measurement 286
7.4.2.1 Verify MPT alarm status
Purpose: Verify no abnormal communication alarm between MSS-1c and MPT
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c.
MCT ⇒ Alarms menu
Verify in the alarms list for that there is no internal communication failure
Verify in the alarms list that there is no TX failure
7.4.2.2 Transmitter power output check
Purpose: Verify via MCT the ODU(s) transmitted power output.
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c.
MCT ⇒ Monitoring → Power Measurement menu
In Configuration → Radio menu, verify that ATPC is ”Disabled” (If required, change the ATPC status to disable in the ATPC field)
Verify that Tx Power value complies with the suitable value already set (If required, change the Tx Power in the Configuration → Radio menu)
7.4.2.3 Received power measurement
Purpose: Verify via MCT the received power to detect any interference
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c.
MCT ⇒ Monitoring → Power Measurement menu
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1286/308
→ In the Refresh period (sec), write the suitable measurement poling time (default = 5 sec)
Pressing “Start” will prompt a graphic monitoring view of the transmitted and received levels.
Verify in the hop calculation (plant documentation) that the calculated received level has been reached.
Verify that there are no interferences.
7.5 End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A
– In Station A, proceed to a final fine alignment of the antenna toward the antenna of Station B. To per-form the fine antenna alignment, refer to Annex A: fine antenna alignment on page 299.
– In Station A, proceed to the remote NE (station B) acquisition (by opening a second NETO session) in order to verify in both the stations:
Received level complies with hop calculation
No alarm showing (except unloaded tributaries)
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 287/308
7.6 Commissioning station A – phase 2 (acceptance test)
Commissioning phase 2 is a site acceptance test procedure made up of the required tests to ensure that the equipment is fully operational.
This phase describes first of all the way to check and to change (if necessary) via the Craft Terminal menu the different configuration parameters already set, for most of them, during the Provisioning followed by various tests.
Most of the tests and checks results have to be recorded in the TRS (Test Results Sheet). Operator will be invited to do so each time it is required by the following sentence: “Report… in the TRS.”
N.B. The lettered titles in following table [ a ) , b ) , etc.] correspond to the page’s heading titles of the TRS document.
Test On page Report in TRS
a) Installation and cabling visual inspection 290
Indoor System installation and cabling visual inspection
Outdoor System installation and cabling visual inspection
b) System configuration 290
Check Software Release
Check/set Mode (Presettings or Adaptive modulation), Channel spacing, Modulation
Check/set Tx/Rx Spacing, Transmission and Reception frequencies
Check/set Link Identifier configuration (optional)
Check/set the QoS criteria to be used
Check/set Tx power (ATPC Off ) or Tx range and Rx threshold (ATPC On)
Check/set the synchronization
Tx and Rx power measurement (with MCT)
Line-side loopback functionality (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
c) E1 traffic 292
Balanced or Unbalanced impedance
E1 point to point loop test
d) Ethernet traffic 293
Check/set Traffic Ethernet port parameters
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1288/308
Test On page Report in TRS
e) NE configuration 293
Check/set the local NE IP address
Check/set the Ethernet access (OS) configuration
Check/set IP static routing configuration
f) Data/Time settings 294
g) Hop E1 stability test 294
h) Ethernet Traffic stability test 295
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 289/308
7.6.1 Installation and cabling visual inspection
7.6.1.1 Indoor System installation and cabling visual inspection
See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.
7.6.1.2 Outdoor System installation and cabling visual inspection
See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.
7.6.2 System configuration
Purpose: Verify via MCT the configuration of the Local Station.
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c
7.6.2.1 Check Software Release
MCT ⇒ Menu Commissioning → Software Download → Tab-panel Software Package Versions
Check the Software release.
Report in the TRS.
7.6.2.2 Check/set Mode (Presettings or Adaptive modulation), Channel spacing, Modulation
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Radio
If required, change any paramater.
Report the parameters in the TRS.
7.6.2.3 Check/set Tx/Rx Spacing, Transmission and Reception frequencies
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Radio
Report the Shifter, Tx and the Rx frequencies in the TRS.
If required, change the Tx frequency. Rx Freq. will be automatically adjusted.
7.6.2.4 Check/set Link Identifier configuration (optional)
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Advanced Radio
If it is necessary, change any parameter.
Report the Link Identifier status (Enabled or Disabled), and, if Enabled, the “Expected” and“Sent” values.
7.6.2.5 Check/set the QoS criteria to be used
Select the suitable QoS criteria to be used: Disabled/802.1p/DiffServ.
Report in the TRS.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1290/308
7.6.2.6 Check/set Tx power (ATPC Off ) or Tx range and Rx threshold (ATPC On)
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Radio
ATPC “Disabled”Report the ATPC “Disabled” status, Tx nominal Power and Tx Power setting into theTRS.
ATPC “Enabled”Report the ATPC “Enabled” status, ATPC Range and ATPC RX Threshold setting in the TRS.
If required, change ATPC Mode or ATPC Range or ATPC Rx Threshold then → Apply
7.6.2.7 Check/set the synchronization
Provisioning Tool → Network Synchronization Clock configuration
Check/set all the parameters regarding the synchronization.
Report in the TRS.
7.6.2.8 Tx and Rx power measurement (with MCT)
Purpose: Verify via MCT the Transmitted (PTx) and Received (PRx) power.
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c
MCT ⇒ Menu Monitoring → Power Measurements
→ In the Refresh Period (sec) write the suitable measurement polling time then press → Start
Pressing “Start” will prompt a graphic monitoring view of the transmitted and received levels.
Report the Current Tx Local End (PTx) and the current Rx Local End (PRx) in the TRS.
7.6.2.9 Line-side loopback functionality (MPT-HC/MPT-MC)
Purpose: Verify via MCT the Line-side loopback functionality (only in the local NE)
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and E1 Data Analyzer
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c Connect Pattern Generator/Error Detector analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
– A delay up to 10 seconds may be observed for each activation/deactivation.– Ensure that the local tributary access is active (unframed and configured).
MCT ⇒ Menu Troubleshooting → Select Line Side → Press Activate
Error Detector showing no errors.Loopback showing in the Troubleshooting view.
To remove the loopback press Deactivate.
Report about the Loopback functionality in the TRS.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 291/308
7.6.3 E1 traffic
7.6.3.1 Balanced or Unbalanced impedance
Provisioning Tool → PDH ports and local IWF Cross Connection configuration
Set the impedance for the E1 streams.
Report the Impedance in the TRS.
7.6.3.2 E1 point to point loop test
Purpose: Verify the point to point Tributaries quality Verify the tributaries alarm status monitoring functionality
Required Instruments: PC with MCT software and E1 Data Analyzer
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1c. Configure all the E1 in TDM2TDM wit the cross-connections to the Radio port. Connect Pattern Generator/Error Detector on Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
MCT ⇒ Menu Alarms
Report the result in the TRS.
Figure 170. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC
N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1292/308
[1] Point to point Tributaries quality test
Assuming that all the tributaries have been enabled and configured (Unframed status and configu-ration) via MCT in both stations and that every tributary is looped at the DDF in the remote station:
♦ Perform one minute of BER test on each E1 tributary
Verify that the analyzer detects no error.
Verify the tributary alarm status:
MCT ⇒ Menu AlarmsVerify that while the data analyzer is connected, the“AlarmLossSignal” on the relevant tributary is off.
[2] Check of the tributaries alarm status monitoring functionality
To create an alarmed condition, remove the “Tributary loopback” at the Remote station.
In Menu Alarms, verify that while the data analyzer is connected, the “AlarmLossSignal”on the relevant tributary goes on.
Restore the “Tributary loopback” at the Remote station, and verify that the “AlarmLossSignal” on there-levant tributary goes off.
7.6.4 Ethernet traffic
7.6.4.1 Check/set Traffic Ethernet port parameters
Provisioning Tool → Ethernet Port configuration
Check and, if it is necessary, change the parameters.
Report in the TRS.
7.6.5 NE configuration
7.6.5.1 Check/set the local NE IP address
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Network Interfaces
Report the local IP Address in the TRS.
7.6.5.2 Check/set the Ethernet access (OS) configuration
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Network Interfaces → NMS IP parameters
Report the IP Address and IP Mask in the TRS.
7.6.5.3 Check/set IP static routing configuration
MCT ⇒ Menu Configuration → Networking → Static Routing
Report the IP Address, IP Mask and Default gateway IP Address or interface type into theTRS.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 293/308
7.6.6 Data/Time settings
MCT ⇒ Menu bar ⇒ Configuration ⇒ NE Time
Enter the time settings.
Report in the TRS.
7.6.7 Hop E1 stability test
N.B.: this test is in alternative to that described in point d) (performed on one Ethernet port)
Purpose: Verify the Hop stability
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and E1 Data Analyzer
Procedure: Connect MCT to MSS-1cConnect Data analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
– The Hop stability test is performed during two consecutive hours, one time, on one Tributary, in real-working condition whatever the protection configuration.
– The two-hour stability test must be free of error in normal propagation conditions (out of fading period)
♦ Via the MCT, let only one active tributary in both station
♦ In the remote Station, place a hardware loop on the relevant tributary access (at the station DDF).
♦ In the local station, connect the E1 Data Analyzer on the relevant tributary. Check that the “Tributary Alarm Loss” disappears.
Verify in both stations that none alarm is active.
Report the two-hour error-free of error Hop Stability Test result in the TRS.
Figure 171. Test bench for tributary functionality check with MPT-HC/MPT-MC
N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1294/308
7.6.8 Ethernet Traffic stability test
Purpose: Verify the quality of point to point Ethernet Data Channels
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and, in alternative: • 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable • 2 additional PCs • 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers
Procedure:
a) Connect MCT to MSS-1c of local station
b) Perform the connectivity test on user port #1, according to the chosen test bench:
• Test bench with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable: see point [1]
• Test bench with 2 additional PCs: see point [2]
• Test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers: see point [3]
c) Perform the connectivity test on user ports #2 , #3 and #4 (if required)If required in plant documentation, repeat the connectivity test [step b) above] for the other three-ports, with obvious test bench changes on remote station.
Report about the connectivity test of Ethernet Data Channels in the TRS.
d) Perform the hop stability test
1) Set up the test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers (point [3]). On both stations, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1.
2) Start this test after the “learning” of the MAC address.
3) Configure the Pattern generator in order to generate continuos traffic and set the data ratehalf to the radio capacity and with packet size of 1518 bytes.
4) Perform the stability test for 2 hours.
5) Compare the number of Tx and Rx Frames on the Pattern A: the number of frames must be equal in normal propagation conditions (out of fading period).
Report the two-hour error-free Ethernet Stability Test result in the TRS.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 295/308
[1] Test bench with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable
a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (testing port).On remote station, through the Ethernet cable, connect the NMS Ethernet port to the Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)
b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to testPerform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of both sta-tions:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full
c) Perform the connectivity test on port #1
1) at local station, on PC connected to Ethernet port #1 (N.B.), ping the remote station (using) the NE’s “Ethernet Configuration IP address”) with 50 packets with 1000 byte length.N.B.: the “PC’s IP address” and the NE’s “Ethernet Configuration IP address” must belong to the same subnetwork.Windows OS details, if necessary:– Start → Programs → Accessories → Command Prompt– ping <space> –l <space> 1000 <space> –n <space> 50 <space> IP Address
<enter>
2) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic runningAt least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet
Figure 172. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 1 additional PC and 1 Ethernet cable
N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1296/308
[2] Test bench with 2 additional PCs
a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (testing port)On remote station, connect the additional PC on Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)
b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to test MCT perform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of
both stations:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full
c) Perform the connectivity test on port #1
1) at local station, on PC connected to Ethernet port #1, ping the far–end PC with 50 packets with 1000 byte length.Windows OS details, if necessary:– Start → Programs → Accessories → Command Prompt– ping <space> –l <space> 1000 <space> –n <space> 50 <space> IP Address
<enter>
2) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic running.At least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet.
Figure 173. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 additional PCs
N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 297/308
[3] Test bench with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers
a) ConnectionsOn local station, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1 (testing port)On remote station, connect the Data analyzer on Ethernet port #1 (port to be tested)
b) Set “Enable”, “Flow Control disable”, and “Capability Advertised” for ports to test MCT perform the following operations on each data port (Ethernet ports #1 to #4) of
both stations:• State ⇒ Enabled• Auto Negotiation Status ⇒ Forced• Flow Control ⇒ Disabled • Speed ⇒ “1000 Mb/s”• Duplex mode ⇒ Full
c) Perform the connectivity test on port #1
1) Start this test after the “learning” of the MAC address.2) Configure Pattern Generator A in order to generate 50 packets with 1000 byte length,
and set the data rate half of the radio capacity.3) the RIGHT LED on the corresponding front panel blinks with cable inserted and traffic
running.At least 45 packets must pass without any packet loss from the 5th packet.
Figure 174. Test bench for optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality with 2 Ethernet Data Analyzers
N.B. With the MPT-HC the Outdoor Power Extractor must be installed.
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1298/308
7.7 Commissioning station B – Phase 2 (acceptance Test)
Repeat in Station B all the tests performed in Station A except the Hop Stability Test that has to be run only one time for the full hop.
Fill a second Test Result Sheet for Station B
END OF COMMISSIONING ACCEPTANCE TEST
7.8 Final operations
Complete the commissioning of each NE, creating the NE operator profiles and saving its data.
7.9 Annex A: fine antenna alignment
Safety requirements for workers on antenna pole, and microwave radiations (EMF norms)
SAFETY RULESWhen operating on the antenna pole, strictly follow cautions. In particular, if ODU is powered on from MSS, do not stand on the antenna axis and beaware of the compliance boundaries.
Antenna pre–pointing should have been done during equipment hardware installation.
This annex explains how to carry out the antenna fine alignment.
To monitor the received level during alignment in the local station:
– use the ODU Rx power monitoring in addition to a voltmeter,
– or, after having logged in the NE, use the Craft Terminal received power measurement facility
Alignment procedure using the ODU Rx power monitoring
a) the radio link must be up and the ATPC disabled
b) in general, fine alignment should be done only on one station of the radio link
c) connect a voltmeter to the ODU (by using the Light Serfice kit cable for the MPT)
d) proceed with Vertical alignment, then with Horizontal alignment
e) in configurations with two antennas, repeat the procedure for the second antenna.
Procedures for Vertical and Horizontal alignment depend on the type of integrated polemounting employed.
Note
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 299/308
User Manual
Line–up and Commissioning
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1300/308
ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ACM Adaptive Coding Modulation
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AP Access Point
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APT Active Problem Table
AS Alarm Surveillance
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AVC Attribute Value Change
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
BR & SW Bridge & Switch
Browser Application which allows to browse all RM-MIB objects
CCLNP ConnectionLess Network Protocol
CD Current Data
CDCC Data Communication Channel
CD-ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CES Circuit Emulation Service
CI Communication Infrastructure
CLA Common Loss Alarm
CRU Clock Reference Unit
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 301/308
CTP Connection Termination Point
CT Craft Terminal
DCI Drop & Continue Interconnection
DCN Data Communications Network
DS Degraded Signal
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Communication Channels
EFC Ethernet Flow Control
EFD Event Forwarding Discriminator
EML Element Management Layer
EML domain A set of NEs that are maintained by the same EML-OS.
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPG Eps Protection Group
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
EPU Eps Protection Unit
EM-OS Element Manager-Operation System
EMS Event Management Services
ES Errored Second
ET Elementary Topology. It is a grouping of some nodes connected according to specific rules. A typical ET is a ring.
ETH ETHernet
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EW Early Warning
FCM Fixed Coding Modulation
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FE Fast Ethernet
FLS Frame Loss Second
FM FM Fault Management
Gbit/s Gigabits per second
ABBREVIATION MEANING
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1302/308
GFP Generic Frame Protocol
GNE Gateway Network Element
HBER High Bit Error Ratio
HD History Data
HET Hetero frequency
HS Hitless Switch
HSB Hot Stand-By
HTML HyperText Markup Language
ICP Internal Communication Problem
IDU InDoor Unit
IM Information Model
IP Internet Protocol
IWF Inter-Working Function
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IM Information Manager
JUSM Java User Service Manager
Kbit/s Kilobits per second
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on D-channel
LBER Low Bit Error Ratio
LCT Local Craft Terminal
MCT Microwave Craft Terminal
LDPC Low Density Parity Check
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOS Loss Of Signal
MAC Medium Access Control
MAU Medium Attachment Unit
Mbit/s Megabits per seconds
MEF Metro Ethernet Forum
ABBREVIATION MEANING
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 303/308
MIB Management Information Base
MPR Microwave Packet Radio
MPT-HC Microwave Packet Transport - High Capacity
MSS Microwave Service Switch
MSS-1c Microwave Service Switch Compact
NE Network Element
NEC Network Element Clock
NMS Network Management system
Node It is the view of the NE at NML level
NSA Not Service Affecting
NTP NetworkTime Protocol
OC ODU Controller
OCN Object Creation Notification
ODN Object deletion Notification
ODU OutDoor Unit
OFS Out of Frame Seconds
OH OverHead
OS Operation System
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PM Performance Monitoring
PNU Packet Node Unit
Port Physical Interface of a Node. A port can be SDH or PDH.
PI Physical Interface
PPI PDH Physical Interface
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTU Packet Transport Unit
QoS Quality of Service
RACS Received Automatic Control Status
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
ABBREVIATION MEANING
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1304/308
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RI Remote Inventory
RPG Rps Protection Group
RPU Rps Protection Unit
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RPPI Radio Plesyochronous Physical Interface
RTP Real Time Protocol
SA Site Aggregator
SCG Service Channel Protection Group
SCN State Change Notification
SCU Service Channel Protection Unit
SD Signal Degrade
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SES Severely Errored Second
SF Signal Failure
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPDH Super PDH
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm
TD Threshold Data
TDF Total Discarded Frames
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TPS Tx Protection Switching
TPG Tps Protection Group
TPU Tps Protection Unit
TRCF Total Received Correct Frames
TRCO Total Received Correct Octets
TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames
TRsp Tx Rx spacing
ABBREVIATION MEANING
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 305/308
TRU Top Rack Unit
TS Time Slot
TTF Total Transmitted Frames
TTO Total Transmitted Octets
TTP Trail Termination Point
UAS UnAvailable Second
UAT UnAvailable Time
USM User Service Manager
UPA Unavailable path alarm
URU Underlying Resource Unavailable
WTR Wait Time to Restore
ABBREVIATION MEANING
User Manual
Abbreviations
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1306/308
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK
The meaning of this section is to collect customer feedback about this handbook.
Scope of this activity is the improvement and innovation of customer documentation through the under-standing of customer needs.
Your comments are welcome.
Please send your comment also if you appreciate the handbook.
You can send them to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.
They will be addressed to the team in charge of the relevant manual.
The following form supplies an example only of useful info, as a guide of the type of expected feedback.
It is possible fill part of the form, add other data and so on.
How to send feedback:
• copying the example form, filling it and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assis-tance Center. In this case handbook data are already available at the page bottom.
• using the same form available as a file in the relevant documentation CD-ROM, saving, filling and sending it by e-mail to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.
• creating a dedicated form on paper or file and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.
We’ll take your suggestion in account.
We reserve to modify consequently the handbook according to the corretness and congruence of the sug-gestion and requests.
User Manual
Customer Documentation Feedback
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1 307/308
308
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK
Handbook DataHandbook title, release,version:Handbook type:Handbook part number and edition:
General Feedback EvaluationSUBJECT 5(max) 4 3 2 1 (min)
Total evaluationInfo quantityInfo qualityInfo structureConsulting facilityLayout
Chapters Feedback EvaluationHANDBOOK PARTS 5(max) 4 3 2 1(min)
PREFACECHAPTER 1CHAPTER 2CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 4CHAPTER 5CHAPTER 6CHAPTER 7Your Comments (stricltly necessary when value is less than 3):
Suggestion for ImprovementWhich subject to deepen:
How to deepen:
Subject to eliminate or reduce
Other comments/suggestions
Errors Identified
Reader InfoName:Company:Address:E-mail:Phone:
User Manual
Customer Documentation Feedback
9500 MPR-E Rel. 2.2.0
3DB 18782 AAAA Issue 1308/308
3DB 18782 AAAA Edition 1
w
All rights reserved.Passing on and copying of this document,
use and communication of its contents is not permittedwithout written authorization from Alcatel -Lucent.
ww.alcatel-lucent.com